[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

CN101777367B - drive unit - Google Patents

drive unit Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN101777367B
CN101777367B CN2010101261941A CN201010126194A CN101777367B CN 101777367 B CN101777367 B CN 101777367B CN 2010101261941 A CN2010101261941 A CN 2010101261941A CN 201010126194 A CN201010126194 A CN 201010126194A CN 101777367 B CN101777367 B CN 101777367B
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
recording
data
information
replacement
management information
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related
Application number
CN2010101261941A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN101777367A (en
Inventor
中村正
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Panasonic Holdings Corp
Original Assignee
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd filed Critical Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd
Publication of CN101777367A publication Critical patent/CN101777367A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN101777367B publication Critical patent/CN101777367B/en
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/12Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/12Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers
    • G11B20/1217Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers on discs
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/06Digital input from, or digital output to, record carriers, e.g. RAID, emulated record carriers or networked record carriers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/18Error detection or correction; Testing, e.g. of drop-outs
    • G11B20/1883Methods for assignment of alternate areas for defective areas
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/10Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/19Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier
    • G11B27/28Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording
    • G11B27/30Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on the same track as the main recording
    • G11B27/3027Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on the same track as the main recording used signal is digitally coded
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/10Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/19Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier
    • G11B27/28Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording
    • G11B27/32Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on separate auxiliary tracks of the same or an auxiliary record carrier
    • G11B27/327Table of contents
    • G11B27/329Table of contents on a disc [VTOC]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/004Recording, reproducing or erasing methods; Read, write or erase circuits therefor
    • G11B7/0045Recording
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/12Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers
    • G11B20/1217Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers on discs
    • G11B2020/1218Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers on discs wherein the formatting concerns a specific area of the disc
    • G11B2020/1222ECC block, i.e. a block of error correction encoded symbols which includes all parity data needed for decoding
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/12Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers
    • G11B2020/1264Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers wherein the formatting concerns a specific kind of data
    • G11B2020/1265Control data, system data or management information, i.e. data used to access or process user data
    • G11B2020/1285Status of the record carrier, e.g. space bit maps, flags indicating a formatting status or a write permission
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/18Error detection or correction; Testing, e.g. of drop-outs
    • G11B2020/1873Temporary defect structures for write-once discs, e.g. TDDS, TDMA or TDFL
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/18Error detection or correction; Testing, e.g. of drop-outs
    • G11B20/1883Methods for assignment of alternate areas for defective areas
    • G11B2020/1893Methods for assignment of alternate areas for defective areas using linear replacement to relocate data from a defective block to a non-contiguous spare area, e.g. with a secondary defect list [SDL]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B2220/00Record carriers by type
    • G11B2220/20Disc-shaped record carriers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B2220/00Record carriers by type
    • G11B2220/20Disc-shaped record carriers
    • G11B2220/21Disc-shaped record carriers characterised in that the disc is of read-only, rewritable, or recordable type
    • G11B2220/215Recordable discs
    • G11B2220/218Write-once discs
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B2220/00Record carriers by type
    • G11B2220/20Disc-shaped record carriers
    • G11B2220/25Disc-shaped record carriers characterised in that the disc is based on a specific recording technology
    • G11B2220/2537Optical discs
    • G11B2220/2541Blu-ray discs; Blue laser DVR discs

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Signal Processing For Digital Recording And Reproducing (AREA)
  • Management Or Editing Of Information On Record Carriers (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to a drive device. The drive device (310) includes a recording/reproducing unit (314) and a drive control unit (311). The drive control device (311) performs a process including: receiving a reproducing instruction; responding to the reproducing instruction, determining whether or not the reproducing of the up-to-date alternation administration information list has succeeded; when the reproducing of the up-to-date alternation administration information list has failed, controlling the recording/reproduction unit (314) to reproduce the locating information before alternation recorded in the alternative area and the user data area; generating the up-to-date alternation administration information list based on the reproduced locating information before alternation; and controlling the recording/reproduction unit (314) to record the up-to-date alternation administration information list in the prescribed position.

Description

驱动装置drive unit

本发明涉及母案为如下申请的分案申请:The present invention relates to a divisional application whose parent application is the following application:

申请日:2005年6月15日Application date: June 15, 2005

申请号:200580027216.6Application number: 200580027216.6

发明名称:驱动装置Invention name: driving device

技术领域 technical field

本发明涉及一种在信息记录媒体中记录数据、并对记录在信息记录媒体中的数据进行再现的驱动装置。The present invention relates to a drive device for recording data on an information recording medium and reproducing the data recorded on the information recording medium.

背景技术 Background technique

近年来,数字数据的记录中使用了各种方式的信息记录媒体,存在可重复改写数据的改写型光盘、和记录次数限于1次、并且媒体的价格便宜的一次写型(write-once)光盘。In recent years, various types of information recording media have been used to record digital data. There are rewritable optical discs that can rewrite data repeatedly, and write-once optical discs that limit the number of recording times to one and the media is cheap. .

作为这种改写型光盘的实例,有DVD-RAM盘、BD-RE(Blu-ray DiscRewritable)盘等。Examples of such rewritable optical discs include DVD-RAM discs, BD-RE (Blu-ray Disc Rewritable) discs, and the like.

另外,作为一次写型光盘的实例,有DVD-R盘、BD-R(Blu-ray DiscRecordable)盘等。In addition, examples of write-once optical discs include DVD-R discs, BD-R (Blu-ray Disc Recordable) discs, and the like.

改写型光盘中为了提高记录在盘上的数据的可靠性,导入了缺陷管理机构。In rewritable optical discs, a defect management mechanism is introduced in order to improve the reliability of data recorded on the disc.

缺陷管理机构大致由移动替换(slipping replacement)算法与线性替换(linear replacement)算法构成。The defect management mechanism is roughly composed of a slipping replacement algorithm and a linear replacement algorithm.

移动替换算法主要在盘的格式化时实施。即,在格式化处理时,检查用户数据区域中的全部ECC簇,一旦发现缺陷簇,就将其位置登录在初级缺陷列表(下面称为PDL)中,使对应的逻辑簇错位对应于不是下一缺陷的物理簇。The move replacement algorithm is mainly implemented when the disk is formatted. That is, during the formatting process, all ECC clusters in the user data area are checked, and once a defective cluster is found, its position is registered in the primary defect list (hereinafter referred to as PDL), so that the corresponding logical cluster is dislocated corresponding to the A physical cluster of defects.

由此,在记录用户数据时,可避开登录在PDL中的缺陷簇进行记录,由此提高数据记录的可靠性。As a result, when recording user data, recording can be performed while avoiding defective clusters registered in the PDL, thereby improving the reliability of data recording.

另一方面,线性替换算法在记录用户数据时实施。On the other hand, the linear replacement algorithm is implemented when recording user data.

即,当记录数据时,执行确认该记录结果的检验处理。在记录失败的情况下,执行了记录的ECC簇变为缺陷簇,利用次级缺陷列表(下面称为SDL)来管理其位置。That is, when data is recorded, verification processing for confirming the recording result is performed. In the case of a recording failure, the ECC cluster on which the recording was performed becomes a defective cluster, and its position is managed by a secondary defect list (hereinafter referred to as SDL).

之后,将用户数据代替记录在设置于盘上的最内周或最外周的交替区域中。After that, user data is instead recorded in alternate areas provided on the disc at the innermost or outermost circumference.

代替记录过程中也执行上述检验处理。若记录成功,则确定数据记录位置,所以在该时刻,生成使缺陷簇的位置信息与代替目的地的ECC簇的位置信息相对应的信息,即SDL条目(SDL Entry),并登录在上述SDL中。The verification process described above is also performed in the substitute recording process. If the recording is successful, the data recording position is determined, so at this time, information corresponding to the position information of the defective cluster and the position information of the ECC cluster of the replacement destination, that is, an SDL entry (SDL Entry), is generated and registered in the above SDL middle.

有时对包含于交替区域中的所有ECC簇设置SDL条目,并管理各个ECC簇是否可作为交替目的地使用、即当前是空区域还是已作为交替目的地使用完毕。该交替区域中的空区域也被称为空闲簇。In some cases, SDL entries are set for all ECC clusters included in the replacement area, and whether each ECC cluster can be used as a replacement destination, that is, whether the area is currently empty or has already been used as a replacement destination is managed. Empty areas in this alternate area are also referred to as free clusters.

再现时,参照PDL或SDL,必要时执行代替目的地的ECC簇的再现。When playing back, refer to the PDL or SDL, and play back the ECC cluster of the replacement destination as necessary.

将上述PDL或SDL记录在设置于盘上的导入区域内的缺陷管理区域(下面记述为DMA)中。在DMA中,另外还包含交替区域的容量等信息。The PDL or SDL described above is recorded in a defect management area (hereinafter referred to as DMA) provided in the lead-in area on the disc. In DMA, information such as the capacity of the alternate area is also included.

在改写型光盘的情况下,通过改写DMA来执行关于缺陷管理的信息更新。In the case of a rewritable optical disc, updating of information on defect management is performed by rewriting DMA.

另外,在一次写型光盘中,如专利文献1所示,也可以导入缺陷管理机构。In addition, in a write-once optical disc, as shown in Patent Document 1, a defect management mechanism may be introduced.

专利文献1的图3A中描述了盘的数据构造。专利文献1的盘将DMA设置在导入区域和导出区域中。The data structure of the disc is described in FIG. 3A of Patent Document 1. The disc of Patent Document 1 has DMAs provided in the lead-in area and the lead-out area.

并且,将暂时缺陷管理区域(TDMA)设置在导入区域和导出区域中。And, a temporary defect management area (TDMA) is set in the lead-in area and the lead-out area.

在一次写型光盘的情况下,每当更新缺陷信息时,便通过向TDMA中补写缺陷信息,由此执行关于缺陷管理的信息更新。In the case of a write-once optical disc, updating of information on defect management is performed by supplementing the defect information into the TDMA every time the defect information is updated.

另外,当执行盘的关闭或最终确定时,将最新的TDMA的内容记录在DMA中。In addition, when closing or finalizing of the disc is performed, the contents of the latest TDMA are recorded in the DMA.

在TDMA中,记录暂时缺陷管理信息(Temporary defectmanagement information:下面记为TDDS)和暂时缺陷信息(Temporary Defect Information:下面记为TDFL)。In TDMA, temporary defect management information (Temporary defect management information: hereinafter referred to as TDDS) and temporary defect information (Temporary Defect Information: hereinafter referred to as TDFL) are recorded.

专利文献1的图5B中示出了TDDS的数据构造。TDDS包含向对应的TDFL的指针信息。由于TDFL多次记录在TDMA中,所以也向各TDFL记录指针信息。FIG. 5B of Patent Document 1 shows the data structure of TDDS. TDDS contains pointer information to the corresponding TDFL. Since TDFLs are recorded multiple times in TDMA, pointer information is also recorded in each TDFL.

并且,在TDDS中,记录一次写型光盘上的最终记录地址(lastrecorded adderss)。如专利文献1的图5B所示,可相对于一个一次写型光盘具有多个最终记录地址。Also, in TDDS, the last recorded address (lastrecorded adderss) on the write-once optical disc is recorded. As shown in FIG. 5B of Patent Document 1, there may be a plurality of final recording addresses for one write-once optical disc.

另外,在TDDS中记录一次写型光盘上的最终记录交替地址(lastrecorded replacement adderss)。如专利文献1的图5B所示,可对一个盘具有多个最终记录交替地址。In addition, the last recorded replacement address (lastrecorded replacement adderss) on the write-once optical disc is recorded in TDDS. As shown in FIG. 5B of Patent Document 1, it is possible to have a plurality of final recording alternate addresses for one disc.

专利文献1的图6示出了TDFL的数据构造。FIG. 6 of Patent Document 1 shows the data structure of TDFL.

TDFL中包含缺陷关联信息(information regarding defect)#1、#2、、、等。TDFL contains defect related information (information regarding defect) #1, #2,,,, etc.

缺陷关联信息包含状态信息(state information)、对缺陷簇的指针、对代替簇的指针。Defect-related information includes state information, pointers to defective clusters, and pointers to replacement clusters.

缺陷关联信息实现与包含在上述SDL中的SDL条目同样的数据构造和功能。The defect-related information realizes the same data structure and function as the SDL entry contained in the above-mentioned SDL.

图33A和图33B表示专利文献1的图9A和图9B公开的TDFL的更新方法。33A and 33B show the updating method of the TDFL disclosed in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B of Patent Document 1. FIG.

图33A示出了TDFL#0的数据构造。TDFL#0包含对缺陷#1、#2、#3的缺陷关联信息#1、#2、#3。Fig. 33A shows the data structure of TDFL#0. TDFL #0 includes defect related information #1, #2, #3 for defects #1, #2, #3.

在记录了TDFL#0之后,对一次写型光盘执行新的数据记录,产生缺陷#4、#5。此时,将图33B所示的TDFL#1记录在一次写型光盘上。After TDFL #0 is recorded, new data recording is performed on the write-once optical disc, and defects #4 and #5 are generated. At this time, TDFL#1 shown in FIG. 33B is recorded on the write-once optical disc.

这里,通过维持所有的包含于TDFL#1中的缺陷管理信息不变、而重新追加对缺陷#4、#5的缺陷关联信息#4、#5,从而生成TDFL#1。Here, TDFL#1 is generated by newly adding defect-related information #4 and #5 for defects #4 and #5 while maintaining all the defect management information included in TDFL#1.

专利文献1的图10示出了缺陷关联信息的数据构造。FIG. 10 of Patent Document 1 shows a data structure of defect-related information.

缺陷关联信息包含状态信息。状态信息包含表示缺陷区域是连续缺陷块(continuous defect block)还是单独缺陷块(single defectblock)的信息。The defect-associated information includes status information. The status information includes information indicating whether the defective area is a continuous defect block or a single defect block.

并且,缺陷关联信息包含对缺陷区域的指针(缺陷区域在盘上的位置)。Also, the defect-related information includes a pointer to a defective area (the position of the defective area on the disc).

并且,缺陷关联信息包含向对应于缺陷区域的代替区域的指针。And, the defect-related information includes a pointer to a replacement area corresponding to the defective area.

在缺陷区域是连续的缺陷块列的情况下,状态信息表示对缺陷区域的指针是连续缺陷块的开始或结束位置。另外,对代替区域的指针表示是这些代替块的开始或结束位置。When the defective area is a sequence of consecutive defective blocks, the state information indicates that the pointer to the defective area is the start or end position of the consecutive defective blocks. In addition, the pointers to the replacement areas indicate the start or end positions of these replacement blocks.

通过使用这些数据构造,在一次写型光盘中实现缺陷管理机构。By using these data structures, a defect management mechanism is realized in write-once optical discs.

并且,若使用上述缺陷管理机构,则在一次写型光盘中也能够实现模拟重写记录。Furthermore, if the above-mentioned defect management mechanism is used, pseudo-overwrite recording can also be realized on a write-once optical disc.

用图31和图32来说明一次写型信息记录媒体中的模拟重写记录。The pseudo-overwrite recording on the write-once information recording medium will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG.

如上所述,在缺陷管理机构中,利用缺陷关联信息或SDL条目等交替信息,不改变记录数据的表观上的逻辑地址,将实际记录数据的物理地址映射到事先确保的其它场所。As described above, in the defect management mechanism, the physical address of the actual recorded data is mapped to another location secured in advance by using alternate information such as defect-related information and SDL entries, without changing the apparent logical address of the recorded data.

因此,当对一次写型光盘上的已记录完成的逻辑地址指示了数据的重写时,将该数据记录在其它物理地址上的扇区中,若更新交替信息以维持最初的逻辑地址,则可在表观上实现重写记录了数据的状态。以下,将这种记录方法称为模拟重写记录。Therefore, when the rewriting of data is instructed to the recorded logical address on the write-once optical disc, the data is recorded in a sector on another physical address, and if the replacement information is updated to maintain the original logical address, then Rewriting the state in which data is recorded can be achieved apparently. Hereinafter, this recording method is referred to as pseudo-overwrite recording.

图31是表示在作为一次写型光盘的信息记录媒体1中记录了几个目录与文件的状态图。设在该状态下,还未执行模拟重写记录。FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a state in which several directories and files are recorded on the information recording medium 1 which is a write-once optical disc. In this state, it is assumed that pseudo-overwrite recording has not yet been performed.

一次写型光盘中,利用轨道和区段(session)等单位来管理盘上的用户数据区域。In the write-once optical disc, the user data area on the disc is managed in units such as a track and a session.

图31中,由文件系统来执行记录在用户数据区域上的用户数据的管理。将文件系统执行管理的空间称为卷空间2。In FIG. 31, management of user data recorded on the user data area is performed by the file system. The space managed by the file system is referred to as volume space 2 .

在下面的说明中,作为构成文件系统的卷/文件构造,记录在信息记录媒体1中的描述符或指针、元数据分区或元数据文件的构造等只要未具体详细地记载,则具有按ISO/IEC13346标准或UDF(Universal Disk Format:通用磁盘格式)标准规定的数据构造。In the following description, as the volume/file structure constituting the file system, descriptors or pointers recorded in the information recording medium 1, metadata partitions, and metadata file structures, etc., are defined in accordance with ISO unless otherwise specified in detail. /IEC13346 standard or UDF (Universal Disk Format: Universal Disk Format) standard stipulates the data structure.

图31中,在卷空间2内,记录了卷构造区域3与物理分区4。In FIG. 31, in the volume space 2, a volume structure area 3 and a physical partition 4 are recorded.

在物理分区4内,包含由UDF标准版本2.5规定的元数据分区5a、5b。In the physical partition 4, metadata partitions 5a and 5b specified by the UDF standard version 2.5 are included.

另外,在物理分区4内,记录了元数据文件6a和作为其复制的元数据镜像文件6b。In addition, in the physical partition 4, a metadata file 6a and a metadata mirror file 6b copied therefrom are recorded.

另外,记录了表示它们在物理分区4中的记录位置的文件条目(FE)、即FE(元数据文件)7a以及FE(元数据镜像文件)7b。另外,还记录了数据文件(File-a)8、数据文件(File-b)9。In addition, file entries (FE) indicating their recording positions in the physical partition 4 , that is, FE (metadata file) 7 a and FE (metadata mirror file) 7 b are recorded. In addition, a data file (File-a) 8 and a data file (File-b) 9 are also recorded.

将FE或目录文件等文件构造的信息全部配置在元数据分区、即元数据文件内。All the information of the file structure such as FE or directory file is configured in the metadata partition, that is, the metadata file.

在由UDF标准规定的数据构造中,在卷构造区域3中记录了元数据分区5a和文件集合描述符(FSD)12的记录位置。In the data structure specified by the UDF standard, the recording positions of the metadata partition 5 a and the file set descriptor (FSD) 12 are recorded in the volume structure area 3 .

作为FSD12的起点,从根(ROOT)目录依次检索文件构造,例如可访问数据文件(File-a)8。As the starting point of the FSD 12 , the file structure, for example, the accessible data file (File-a) 8 is sequentially retrieved from the root (ROOT) directory.

之后,若在图31的状态下重新模拟重写数据文件(File-c),则变为图32所示的状态。After that, if the data file (File-c) is simulated and rewritten again in the state of FIG. 31, the state shown in FIG. 32 will be obtained.

这里,设在信息记录媒体1上的根目录正下方记录了数据文件(File-c)。Here, it is assumed that a data file (File-c) is recorded directly under the root directory on the information recording medium 1 .

当记录数据文件(File-c)时,更新、生成追加数据文件(File-c)所需的文件构造的信息。具体而言,更新FE(根)13或生成FE(File-c)14。When the data file (File-c) is recorded, the information of the file structure required to add the data file (File-c) is updated and generated. Specifically, FE (root) 13 is updated or FE (File-c) 14 is generated.

之后,将数据文件(File-c)15记录在图31的未记录区域中,变为图32的状态。After that, the data file (File-c) 15 is recorded in the unrecorded area of FIG. 31, and the state of FIG. 32 is obtained.

当记录FE(File-c)14时,将FE(File-c)14记录在元数据分区5a(即元数据文件6a)内的未记录区域11a中。When the FE(File-c) 14 is recorded, the FE(File-c) 14 is recorded in the unrecorded area 11a within the metadata partition 5a (ie, the metadata file 6a).

之后,对FE(根)13模拟重写记录FE(根)16。Thereafter, the FE (root) 16 is simulated to be overwritten to the FE (root) 13 .

此时,如图32所示,将FE(根)16的数据记录在交替区域17中。At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 , data of FE (root) 16 is recorded in alternate area 17 .

并且,更新包含于盘管理信息2中的交替信息,将FE(根)13映射到FE(根)16。Then, the alternation information included in the disk management information 2 is updated, and the FE (root) 13 is mapped to the FE (root) 16 .

在执行了这种文件的记录处理之后,再现数据文件(File-c)15的动作如下。After the recording process of such a file is executed, the operation of the playback data file (File-c) 15 is as follows.

根据信息记录媒体1的卷构造区域3取得FE(元数据文件)7a与FSD12的位置信息。The location information of FE (metadata file) 7a and FSD 12 is obtained from the volume structure area 3 of the information recording medium 1 .

之后,执行文件构造的再现。为了再现文件构造,根据已取得的FE(元数据文件)7a与FSD12的位置信息,执行FSD12的再现。Afterwards, reproduction of the file structure is performed. In order to reproduce the file structure, the FSD12 is reproduced based on the acquired FE (metadata file) 7a and the location information of the FSD12.

根据再现的FSD12,取得FE(根)13的位置信息,作为逻辑地址。Based on the reproduced FSD 12, the location information of the FE (root) 13 is acquired as a logical address.

根据取得的FE(根)13的位置信息(逻辑地址),执行FE(根)13的再现。Based on the acquired position information (logical address) of the FE (root) 13, playback of the FE (root) 13 is performed.

此时,参照交替信息,再现映射到FE(根)13的位置信息(逻辑地址)上的FE(根)16。At this time, referring to the alternate information, the FE (root) 16 mapped to the position information (logical address) of the FE (root) 13 is reproduced.

FE(根)16包含最新的根目录文件,故具有至FE(File-c)14的位置信息。FE (root) 16 includes the latest root directory file, so it has location information to FE (File-c) 14 .

使用从FE(File-c)14得到的数据文件(File-c)15的位置信息,执行数据文件(File-c)15的再现。Using the location information of the data file (File-c) 15 obtained from the FE (File-c) 14, the playback of the data file (File-c) 15 is executed.

如上所述,即便在一次写型光盘中,也可以通过使用缺陷管理机构来执行模拟重写记录。As described above, even in a write-once optical disc, it is possible to perform pseudo-overwrite recording by using the defect management mechanism.

专利文献1:美国专利申请公开第2004/0076096号说明书Patent Document 1: Specification of US Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0076096

但是,在上述说明的一次写型光盘的模拟重写记录方式中,若无交替区域中的未记录区域,则即便用户数据区域中残留了未记录区域,也存在不能再记录数据的课题。这是因为不能更新文件系统信息的缘故。However, in the pseudo-overwrite recording method of the write-once optical disc described above, if there is no unrecorded area in the alternate area, there is a problem that no more data can be recorded even if an unrecorded area remains in the user data area. This is because the file system information cannot be updated.

尤其是在一次写型光盘的情况下,与在必要的时刻可扩展交替区域的容量的改写型光盘不同,交替区域的容量在盘的格式化(初始化)时便确定下来。In particular, in the case of a write-once optical disc, unlike a rewritable optical disc in which the capacity of the spare area can be expanded when necessary, the capacity of the spare area is determined when the disc is formatted (initialized).

另外,假设执行模拟重写记录,难以事先确定适当的交替区域的容量。In addition, assuming that pseudo-overwrite recording is performed, it is difficult to determine an appropriate spare area capacity in advance.

若事先确定的交替区域的容量大,则用户数据区域的容量会减小,若事先确定的交替区域的容量过小,则导致虽然用户数据区域中残留了未记录区域但不能再记录数据的状况发生。在任一情况下,都不能有效利用一次写型光盘的用户数据区域。If the capacity of the spare area determined in advance is large, the capacity of the user data area will be reduced. If the capacity of the spare area determined in advance is too small, it will result in a situation where data cannot be recorded even though an unrecorded area remains in the user data area. occur. In either case, the user data area of the write-once optical disc cannot be effectively utilized.

发明内容 Contents of the invention

本发明是为了解决上述问题而提出的,其目的在于提供一种在一次写型光盘的模拟重写记录中,可不浪费地使用用户数据区域的驱动装置。The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a drive device capable of using a user data area without waste in pseudo-overwrite recording of a write-once optical disc.

本发明的驱动装置是一种对记录在一次写型记录媒体中的数据进行再现的驱动装置,其特征在于:所述一次写型记录媒体包含交替区域和用户数据区域,所述交替区域与所述用户数据区域分别包含多个ECC簇,所述多个ECC簇分别包含多个物理扇区,在所述多个ECC簇中分别记录了交替前位置信息,在根据记录指示执行的数据记录是补写的情况下,对所述交替前位置信息设定表示不执行交替记录的信息,在根据所述记录指示执行的数据记录是第1次模拟重写记录的情况下,对所述交替前位置信息设定表示由所述记录指示指定的位置的信息,在根据所述记录指示执行的数据记录是第2次以后的模拟重写记录的情况下,对所述交替前位置信息设定表示由所述记录指示指定的位置交替目的地的信息,所述驱动装置包含:对所述一次写型记录媒体执行记录动作或再现动作的记录再现部;和控制所述记录再现部的驱动控制部,所述驱动控制部至少执行:接收再现指示;响应于所述再现指示,确定最新的交替管理信息列表的再现是否失败;在确定为所述最新的交替管理信息列表的再现失败的情况下,控制所述记录再现部,以对记录在所述交替区域和所述用户数据区域中的交替前位置信息进行再现;根据所述再现的交替前位置信息,生成最新的交替管理信息列表;和控制所述记录再现部,以将所述最新的交替管理信息列表记录在所述规定的位置。The drive device of the present invention is a drive device for reproducing data recorded on a write-once recording medium, wherein the write-once recording medium includes an alternate area and a user data area, and the alternate area and the The user data area includes a plurality of ECC clusters respectively, and the plurality of ECC clusters respectively include a plurality of physical sectors, and position information before replacement is respectively recorded in the plurality of ECC clusters, and the data recording performed according to the recording instruction is In the case of overwriting, information indicating that alternate recording is not performed is set in the pre-alternation position information, and when the data recording performed according to the recording instruction is the first simulated overwrite recording, the pre-alternation position information is set to The location information sets information indicating a location specified by the recording instruction, and when the data recording executed according to the recording instruction is the second or subsequent pseudo-overwrite recording, the pre-alternation location information is set to indicate The information indicating that the position designated by the recording instruction alternates destinations, the drive device includes: a recording and reproducing unit that performs a recording operation or a reproducing operation on the write-once recording medium; and a drive control unit that controls the recording and reproducing unit. wherein the drive control unit at least executes: receiving a playback instruction; in response to the playback instruction, determining whether playback of the latest replacement management information list has failed; when it is determined that playback of the latest replacement management information list has failed, controlling the recording and reproducing section to reproduce pre-alternation position information recorded in the alternate area and the user data area; generating the latest alternation management information list based on the reproduced pre-alternation position information; and controlling The recording and reproducing unit is configured to record the latest replacement management information list in the predetermined location.

其特征亦可在于:在确定为所述最新的交替管理信息列表的再现失败的情况下,读出已记录的交替管理信息列表,选择再现成功的最近的交替管理信息列表,在确定为所述最新的交替管理信息列表的再现失败的情况下,从所述用户数据区域再现的所述交替前位置信息是从所述用户数据区域中的、包含如下数据的区域所再现的交替前位置信息,该数据是在登录于所述再现成功的最近的交替管理信息列表中的记录数据之后记录的,根据所述再现的交替前位置信息和所述再现成功的最近的交替管理信息列表,生成所述最新的交替管理信息列表。It may also be characterized in that: when it is determined that reproduction of the latest replacement management information list has failed, the recorded replacement management information list is read, and the latest replacement management information list that has been successfully reproduced is selected, and when it is determined that the replacement management information list is the When the reproduction of the latest replacement management information list fails, the pre-replacement position information reproduced from the user data area is the pre-replacement position information reproduced from an area including data in the user data area, This data is recorded after the recording data registered in the latest replacement management information list that has been successfully reproduced, and the reproduction is generated based on the position information before replacement of the reproduction and the latest replacement management information list that has been successfully reproduced. List of up-to-date alternate management information.

根据本发明,可提供一种在一次写型光盘的模拟重写记录中、可不浪费地使用用户数据区域的驱动装置。According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a drive device capable of using a user data area without waste in pseudo-overwrite recording of a write-once optical disc.

附图说明 Description of drawings

图1A是表示本发明实施方式的信息记录媒体100的一例外观的图。FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an external appearance of an example of an information recording medium 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.

图1B是表示本发明实施方式的信息记录媒体100的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the information recording medium 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图1C是表示图1B所示的用户数据区域108的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 1C is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the user data area 108 shown in FIG. 1B.

图2A是表示本发明实施方式的区段管理信息200的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an example of a data structure of segment management information 200 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图2B是表示本发明实施方式的轨道管理信息210的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of track management information 210 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图2C是表示本发明实施方式的空区域管理信息220的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 2C is a diagram showing an example of a data structure of empty area management information 220 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图3是表示本发明实施方式的盘构造信息1100的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of disc structure information 1100 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图4是表示本发明实施方式的其它信息记录媒体100b的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a data structure of another information recording medium 100b according to an embodiment of the present invention.

图5A是表示本发明实施方式的交替管理信息列表1000的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 5A is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the replacement management information list 1000 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图5B是表示本发明实施方式的交替管理信息1010的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the replacement management information 1010 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图6是表示本发明实施方式的信息记录再现装置300的一例构成的框图。FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an example configuration of an information recording and reproducing device 300 according to an embodiment of the present invention.

图7是表示本发明实施方式的格式化处理后的信息记录媒体上的一例数据构造的图。Fig. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a data structure on an information recording medium after format processing according to an embodiment of the present invention.

图8A是表示本发明实施方式中的记录处理的流程图。FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing recording processing in the embodiment of the present invention.

图8B是表示本发明实施方式中的RMW处理的流程图。Fig. 8B is a flowchart showing RMW processing in the embodiment of the present invention.

图9是表示本发明实施方式中的记录处理后的信息记录媒体上的一例数据构造的图。Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a data structure on an information recording medium after recording processing in the embodiment of the present invention.

图10是表示本发明实施方式中的再现处理的流程图。FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing playback processing in the embodiment of the present invention.

图11是表示本发明实施方式中的交替管理信息1010B的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a data structure of replacement management information 1010B in the embodiment of the present invention.

图12是表示本发明实施方式中的物理地址空间和逻辑地址空间的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of data structures of a physical address space and a logical address space in the embodiment of the present invention.

图13A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图13B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information related to the embodiment of the present invention.

图14A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 14A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图14B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 14B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图15A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 15A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图15B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information related to the embodiment of the present invention.

图16A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。FIG. 16A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图16B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。FIG. 16B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information related to the embodiment of the present invention.

图17A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 17A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图17B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 17B is an explanatory diagram related to the replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图18是表示作为发明实施方式的交替管理信息的DFL条目2010的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a data structure of a DFL entry 2010 as replacement management information according to an embodiment of the invention.

图19A是表示本发明实施方式的记录处理的流程图。Fig. 19A is a flowchart showing recording processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图19B是表示本发明实施方式的记录处理的流程图。Fig. 19B is a flowchart showing recording processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图20A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。FIG. 20A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图20B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。FIG. 20B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information related to the embodiment of the present invention.

图21A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 21A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图21B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information related to the embodiment of the present invention.

图22A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图22B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 22B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图23A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 23A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图23B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 23B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图24A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。FIG. 24A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图24B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 24B is an explanatory diagram related to the replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图25是本发明实施方式的轨道管理信息的数据构造的示例图。Fig. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of track management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图26A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 26A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图26B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 26B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图27是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 27 is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图28是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 28 is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图29是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 29 is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图30是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 30 is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图31是表示现有技术的信息记录媒体上的一例数据构造的图。Fig. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a data structure on a conventional information recording medium.

图32是表示现有技术的文件记录处理后的信息记录媒体上的一例数据构造的图。Fig. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a data structure on an information recording medium after file recording processing in the prior art.

图33A是表示现有技术的TDFL的一例数据构造的图。Fig. 33A is a diagram showing an example of a data structure of a conventional TDFL.

图33B是表示现有技术的TDFL的一例数据构造的图。Fig. 33B is a diagram showing an example of a data structure of a conventional TDFL.

图34是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 34 is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图35是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 35 is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图36A是表示本发明实施方式的记录处理的流程图。Fig. 36A is a flowchart showing recording processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图36B是表示本发明实施方式的记录处理的流程图。Fig. 36B is a flowchart showing recording processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图36C是表示本发明实施方式的记录处理的流程图。Fig. 36C is a flowchart showing recording processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图37是表示本发明实施方式的再现处理的流程图。Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing playback processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图38A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 38A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图39A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 39A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图39B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 39B is an explanatory diagram related to the replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图40A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图41是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 41 is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图42是表示本发明实施方式的再生处理的流程图。Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing regeneration processing according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图43A是关于本发明实施方式的交替记录的说明图。Fig. 43A is an explanatory diagram related to alternate recording according to the embodiment of the present invention.

图43B是关于本发明实施方式的交替管理信息的说明图。Fig. 43B is an explanatory diagram of replacement management information according to the embodiment of the present invention.

具体实施方式 Detailed ways

下面,参照附图来说明本发明的实施方式。Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(实施方式1)(Embodiment 1)

图1A表示本发明实施方式的信息记录媒体100的外观。FIG. 1A shows the appearance of an information recording medium 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.

在信息记录媒体100的最内周配置了导入区域101。在信息记录媒体100的最外周配置了导出区域103。在信息记录媒体100的导入区域101与导出区域103之间配置了数据区域102。A lead-in area 101 is arranged on the innermost periphery of the information recording medium 100 . A lead-out area 103 is arranged on the outermost periphery of the information recording medium 100 . A data area 102 is arranged between a lead-in area 101 and a lead-out area 103 of the information recording medium 100 .

在导入区域101中,记录了包含于后述的记录再现部314中的光拾取器访问信息记录媒体100时所需的基准信息、或与其它记录媒体的识别信息等。导入区域103中也记录了与导入区域101中记录的信息相同的信息。In the lead-in area 101, reference information necessary for an optical pickup included in the recording/reproducing unit 314 described later to access the information recording medium 100, identification information with other recording media, and the like are recorded. The same information as that recorded in the lead-in area 101 is also recorded in the lead-in area 103 .

向导入区域101、数据区域102和导出区域103分配了多个物理扇区。各物理扇区是最小的存取单位。利用称为物理扇区序号(下面记作PSN)的地址信息来识别各物理扇区。A plurality of physical sectors are allocated to the lead-in area 101 , the data area 102 and the lead-out area 103 . Each physical sector is the smallest access unit. Each physical sector is identified by address information called a physical sector number (hereinafter referred to as PSN).

将包含多个物理扇区的ECC簇(或ECC块)作为最小的单位,执行数据的记录、再现。Data is recorded and reproduced using an ECC cluster (or ECC block) including a plurality of physical sectors as the smallest unit.

图1B表示信息记录媒体100的数据构造。图1B中,横向配置示出了图1A中示为同心圆状的导入区域101、数据区域102和导出区域103。FIG. 1B shows the data structure of the information recording medium 100 . In FIG. 1B , the horizontal arrangement shows the lead-in area 101 , the data area 102 and the lead-out area 103 shown as concentric circles in FIG. 1A .

导入区域101包含盘管理信息区域104,导出区域103包含盘管理信息区域105。The lead-in area 101 includes a disc management information area 104 , and the lead-out area 103 includes a disc management information area 105 .

在盘管理信息区域104、105中记录盘管理信息。盘管理信息包含后述的交替管理信息列表、或区段管理信息、空区域管理信息等。盘管理信息区域104、105被用作更新盘管理信息的区域。该更新用区域也被称为暂时盘管理信息区域。Disc management information is recorded in the disc management information areas 104 and 105 . The disk management information includes an alternate management information list to be described later, session management information, free area management information, and the like. The disc management information areas 104, 105 are used as areas for updating disc management information. This update area is also called a temporary disk management information area.

在将本发明适用于BD-R标准的情况下,将本说明书中的术语‘盘管理信息区域’读作‘盘管理区域’,将本说明书中的术语‘暂时盘管理信息区域’读作‘暂时盘管理区域’,将本说明书中的术语‘盘管理信息’读作‘盘管理构造’,将本说明书中的术语‘暂时盘管理信息’读作‘暂时盘管理构造’。In the case of applying the present invention to the BD-R standard, the term 'disc management information area' in this specification is read as 'disc management area', and the term 'temporary disc management information area' in this specification is read as ' For the temporary disk management area', the term 'disk management information' in this specification is read as 'disk management structure', and the term 'temporary disk management information' in this specification is read as 'temporary disk management structure'.

数据区域102包含内周交替区域106、用户数据区域108与外周交替区域107。The data area 102 includes an inner alternate area 106 , a user data area 108 and an outer alternate area 107 .

用户数据区域108是用于记录用户数据的区域。The user data area 108 is an area for recording user data.

图1C表示用户数据区域108的数据构造。FIG. 1C shows the data structure of the user data area 108 .

用户数据区域108包含多个区段。各区段包含多个轨道。The user data area 108 includes a plurality of sectors. Each section contains multiple tracks.

各轨道是信息记录媒体100上的连续区域。由后述的轨道管理信息来管理各轨道。Each track is a continuous area on the information recording medium 100 . Each track is managed by track management information described later.

另外,在将本发明适用于BD-R标准的情况下,将本说明书中的术语‘轨道’读作‘按序记录区域(SRR)’。In addition, when the present invention is applied to the BD-R standard, the term 'track' in this specification is read as 'sequential recording region (SRR)'.

各区段包含连续配置于信息记录媒体100上的多个轨道。由后述的区段管理信息来管理各区段。Each session includes a plurality of tracks continuously arranged on the information recording medium 100 . Each session is managed by session management information described later.

图2A表示用于管理区段的区段管理信息200的数据构造。区段管理信息200包含于盘管理信息中。FIG. 2A shows the data structure of session management information 200 for managing sessions. The session management information 200 is included in the disc management information.

区段管理信息200包含标题信息201和多个轨道管理信息。The session management information 200 includes title information 201 and pieces of track management information.

标题信息201具有区段管理信息200的识别符、或图2B所示的轨道管理信息210的数量等一般的信息。The header information 201 includes general information such as an identifier of the session management information 200 and the number of track management information 210 shown in FIG. 2B .

轨道管理信息#N具有对应于图1C所示轨道#N的信息。这里,N为1以上的整数。Track management information #N has information corresponding to track #N shown in FIG. 1C. Here, N is an integer of 1 or more.

图2B表示用于管理轨道的轨道管理信息210的数据构造。轨道管理信息210包含于盘管理信息中。FIG. 2B shows the data structure of track management information 210 for managing tracks. Track management information 210 is included in disc management information.

轨道管理信息210包含表示轨道是否是区段的开头轨道的区段开始信息211、表示轨道的开始位置的轨道开始位置信息212、和表示轨道内最后记录了数据的位置的轨道内最终数据记录位置信息(下面记作LRA)213。The track management information 210 includes session start information 211 indicating whether the track is the head track of a session, track start position information 212 indicating the start position of the track, and the last data recording position in the track indicating the position where data is last recorded in the track. Information (hereinafter referred to as LRA) 213 .

当由某个轨道管理信息210管理的轨道位于区段的开头时,将表示该轨道位于区段开头的值(例如“1”)设定到区段开始信息211。在此外的情况下,将不同的值(例如“0”)设定到区段开始信息211。When a track managed by certain track management information 210 is located at the head of a section, a value indicating that the track is located at the head of the section (for example, “1”) is set to the section start information 211 . In other cases, a different value (for example, “0”) is set to the section start information 211 .

轨道开始位置信息212包含表示轨道的开始位置的物理地址。The track start position information 212 includes a physical address indicating the start position of the track.

轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213包含表示轨道内记录了有效数据的最终位置的物理地址。所谓有效的数据是例如从主机装置305提供的用户数据。图1C所示的LRA120或LRA121是轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213的一例。The last data recording position information in a track 213 includes a physical address indicating the final position in a track where valid data is recorded. Valid data is, for example, user data provided from the host device 305 . LRA120 or LRA121 shown in FIG. 1C is an example of the last data recording position information 213 in a track.

另外,在将本发明适用于BD-R标准的情况下,将本说明书中的术语‘轨道管理信息’读作‘按序记录区域条目’,将本说明书中的术语‘区段管理信息’读作‘按序记录区域信息’。In addition, when the present invention is applied to the BD-R standard, the term 'track management information' in this specification is read as 'sequential recording area entry', and the term 'session management information' in this specification is read as as 'sequentially record area information'.

当信息记录媒体100以ECC簇为最小单位执行数据记录时,轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213并不始终与ECC簇边界匹配。这是因为,通常,记录指示的数据容量不是ECC簇的容量的整数倍。此时,LRA213表示记录了记录指示的数据的最后物理扇区的地址。When the information recording medium 100 performs data recording with an ECC cluster as the minimum unit, the in-track final data recording position information 213 does not always match the ECC cluster boundary. This is because, generally, the data capacity indicated by the record is not an integral multiple of the capacity of the ECC cluster. At this time, LRA 213 indicates the address of the last physical sector in which the data of the recording instruction is recorded.

另外,在LRA213与ECC簇边界不一致的情况下,承接在记录指示的数据之后,记录填充数据(padding data),直到ECC簇边界为止。Also, when the LRA 213 does not coincide with the ECC cluster boundary, padding data (padding data) is recorded until the ECC cluster boundary after recording the indicated data.

在本实施方式中,可按每个轨道记录数据。新的数据记录从各轨道的开头执行,在轨道内连续配置数据(按序记录)。若在该轨道内执行数据的记录,则该轨道内最后记录的位置被反映到轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213。In this embodiment, data can be recorded for each track. New data recording is performed from the head of each track, and data is continuously arranged in the track (sequential recording). When data recording is performed in the track, the last recorded position in the track is reflected in the last data recording position information 213 in the track.

在该轨道内重新开始记录的情况下,通过调查最新的轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213的值,可知道该轨道内的下一个记录开始位置。When the recording is restarted in the track, the next recording start position in the track can be known by checking the value of the last data recording position information 213 in the latest track.

在分配了轨道之后,在该轨道内完全未记录数据的情况下,也可将表示该状态的规定值(例如“0”)设定到轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213。After a track is allocated, if no data is recorded in the track at all, a predetermined value (for example, "0") indicating this state may be set in the last data recording position information 213 in the track.

下次可记录位置(下面记作NWA)表示由轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213表示的物理扇区的下一物理扇区的位置。或者,在信息记录媒体100以某一ECC簇为最小单位执行数据记录的情况下,NWA表示包含由轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213表示的物理扇区的ECC簇的下一ECC簇的开头位置。The next recordable position (hereinafter referred to as NWA) indicates the position of the physical sector next to the physical sector indicated by the last data recording position information 213 in the track. Alternatively, when the information recording medium 100 performs data recording with a certain ECC cluster as the minimum unit, NWA indicates the head position of the next ECC cluster of the ECC cluster including the physical sector indicated by the last data recording position information 213 in the track .

若用算式来表示,则如(式1)所示。If it is represented by a formula, it is as shown in (Formula 1).

(式1)(Formula 1)

(a)LRA≠0时,(a) When LRA≠0,

NWA=N×(Floor(LRA/N)+1)NWA=N×(Floor(LRA/N)+1)

N:包含于ECC簇中的物理扇区数量(例如N=32)N: the number of physical sectors included in the ECC cluster (for example, N=32)

(b)LRA=0时,(b) When LRA=0,

NWA=(对应轨道的开始位置)NWA=(corresponding to the start position of the track)

其中,Floor(x)为x以下的最大整数值。Wherein, Floor(x) is the largest integer value below x.

在下面的说明中,假设NWA表示ECC簇的开头位置。In the following description, it is assumed that NWA indicates the head position of an ECC cluster.

将处于可记录数据的状态下的轨道称为开放轨道。A track in a state where data can be recorded is called an open track.

开放轨道的轨道序号包含于图2A所示的区段管理信息200中的标题信息201中(例如第1开放轨道序号203、第2开放轨道序号204等)。The track numbers of the open tracks are included in the header information 201 of the session management information 200 shown in FIG. 2A (for example, the first open track number 203 , the second open track number 204 , etc.).

另一方面,将不是开放轨道的轨道称为关闭轨道。On the other hand, a track that is not an open track is called a closed track.

例如,不存在未记录区域的轨道、或用户指示的轨道为关闭轨道。For example, a track with no unrecorded area or a track designated by the user is a closed track.

与开放轨道不同,关闭轨道的轨道序号未存储在区段管理信息200中的标题信息210内。Unlike open tracks, track numbers of closed tracks are not stored in the header information 210 in the session management information 200 .

禁止向关闭轨道记录数据。Recording data to closed tracks is prohibited.

通过调查开放轨道序号与轨道管理信息210中的轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213,可知道信息记录媒体100上的未记录区域。The unrecorded area on the information recording medium 100 can be known by checking the open track number and the last data recording location information 213 in the track in the track management information 210 .

在将本发明适用于BD-R标准的情况下,开放轨道表示开放SRR。另外,关闭轨道表示关闭SRR。When the present invention is applied to the BD-R standard, the open track means open SRR. Also, turning off the track means turning off the SRR.

另外,在一次写型信息记录媒体100中,通过管理已记录的ECC簇,可执行在信息记录媒体上的任意位置(物理地址)中记录数据的一种随机记录。In addition, in the write-once type information recording medium 100, by managing recorded ECC clusters, a random recording of recording data in an arbitrary position (physical address) on the information recording medium can be performed.

为了实现这种随机记录,需要管理信息记录媒体100上的空区域和管理最终数据记录位置。In order to realize such random recording, it is necessary to manage the empty area on the information recording medium 100 and manage the final data recording position.

在本实施方式中,使用图2C所示的空区域管理信息220和记录在盘管理信息区域104、105中的盘管理信息,实现这种管理。In this embodiment, such management is realized using the free area management information 220 shown in FIG. 2C and the disk management information recorded in the disk management information areas 104 and 105 .

在执行随机记录的情况下,在盘管理信息区域104中记录图2C所示的空区域管理信息220。In the case of performing random recording, empty area management information 220 shown in FIG. 2C is recorded in the disc management information area 104 .

图2C表示空区域信息220的数据构造。空区域信息220包含标题信息221、管理对象区域信息222和空区域信息223。FIG. 2C shows the data structure of the empty area information 220. As shown in FIG. Empty area information 220 includes title information 221 , managed area information 222 , and vacant area information 223 .

标题信息221具有空区域管理信息220的识别符等一般的信息。The header information 221 includes general information such as an identifier of the empty area management information 220 .

管理对象区域信息222包含:对包含由空区域管理信息220管理未记录/已记录状态的扇区之用户数据区域108中的区域进行指定的信息。例如,管理对象区域信息222包含该区域的开始位置或该区域的长度。The managed area information 222 includes information specifying an area in the user data area 108 including sectors whose unrecorded/recorded states are managed by the empty area management information 220 . For example, the managed area information 222 includes the start position of the area or the length of the area.

空区域信息223包含:表示包含于构成管理对象的区域中的各ECC簇是未记录还是已记录的信息。例如,对各ECC簇各分配1比特的数据,若该ECC簇为未记录,则例如设定“0”,若为已记录,则例如设定“1”,由此可管理针对对象区域的全部ECC簇的空状况。The empty area information 223 includes information indicating whether each ECC cluster included in the area constituting the management target is unrecorded or recorded. For example, 1 bit of data is assigned to each ECC cluster, and if the ECC cluster is unrecorded, for example, "0" is set, and if the ECC cluster is recorded, for example, "1" is set, whereby the data for the target area can be managed. Empty status of all ECC clusters.

记录在盘管理信息区域104中的盘管理信息包含图3所示的盘构造信息1100。盘构造信息1100包含最终数据记录位置信息1107。最终数据记录位置信息1107包含表示用户数据区域108内最后记录数据的位置的物理地址。The disc management information recorded in the disc management information area 104 includes the disc configuration information 1100 shown in FIG. 3 . The disc structure information 1100 includes final data recording position information 1107 . The last data recording position information 1107 includes a physical address indicating the position where data is last recorded in the user data area 108 .

盘构造信息1100还包含:关于盘构造信息1100整体的一般信息1101;表示最新的交替管理信息列表1000在盘管理信息区域104、105内的位置信息的交替管理信息列表位置信息1102;表示用户区域108的开始位置的用户区域开始位置信息1103;表示用户区域108的终端位置的用户区域终端位置信息1104;盘管理信息区域信息1107b;以及表示内周交替区域106和外周交替区域107的容量或可用于交替的区域的交替区域信息1105和交替区域管理信息1108。The disk configuration information 1100 also includes: general information 1101 about the entire disk configuration information 1100; replacement management information list position information 1102 indicating the position information of the latest replacement management information list 1000 in the disk management information areas 104 and 105; The user area start position information 1103 of the starting position of 108; the user area terminal position information 1104 representing the terminal position of the user area 108; the disk management information area information 1107b; Alternate area information 1105 and alternate area management information 1108 for an alternate area.

通过使用盘管理信息区域信息1107b,可对每个信息记录媒体变更盘管理信息区域的容量。并且,通过使用盘管理信息区域信息1107b,从而可在内周交替区域106或外周交替区域107中改变上述暂时盘管理信息区域的容量。By using the disc management information area information 1107b, the capacity of the disc management information area can be changed for each information recording medium. Furthermore, by using the disk management information area information 1107b, the capacity of the temporary disk management information area can be changed in the inner spare area 106 or the outer spare area 107.

通过使用交替区域信息1105,可对每个信息记录媒体改变交替区域的容量。例如,可将内周交替区域106或外周交替区域107的容量指定为0。By using the spare area information 1105, the capacity of the spare area can be changed for each information recording medium. For example, the capacity of the inner alternate region 106 or the outer alternate region 107 can be designated as 0.

交替区域管理信息1108包含表示内周交替区域106、外周交替区域107中下次可利用的位置的下次可使用位置信息。The replacement area management information 1108 includes next usable position information indicating next available positions in the inner circumference replacement area 106 and the outer circumference replacement area 107 .

在各交替区域中,与轨道一样,按序记录。各交替区域中的下次可使用位置信息实现与轨道中的NWA相同的功能,从由下次可使用位置信息表示的位置开始,依次执行向各交替区域记录新的数据。In each alternate area, it is recorded sequentially as in the track. The next usable position information in each spare area realizes the same function as the NWA in the track, and recording of new data to each spare area is performed sequentially from the position indicated by the next usable position information.

盘构造信息1100还包含:区段管理信息位置信息1109,表示最新的区段管理信息200在盘管理信息区域104、105内的位置信息;和空区域管理信息位置信息1110,表示最新的空区域管理信息220在盘管理信息区域104、105内的位置信息。The disc structure information 1100 also includes: segment management information position information 1109, indicating the position information of the latest segment management information 200 in the disc management information area 104, 105; and empty area management information position information 1110, indicating the latest empty area The management information 220 is position information within the disc management information areas 104 and 105 .

如上所述,使用区段管理信息200或空区域管理信息220之一均可管理信息记录媒体100上的物理扇区的空状况。由此,也可以根据用途来选择使用区段管理信息200或空区域管理信息220之一。或者,同时使用两者。这种涉及空区域管理方式的信息包含于盘构造信息1100的记录种类信息1106中。As described above, the empty status of physical sectors on the information recording medium 100 can be managed using either the session management information 200 or the empty area management information 220 . Thus, one of the segment management information 200 and the empty area management information 220 can be selectively used according to the usage. Or, use both at the same time. Such information related to the free area management method is included in the recording type information 1106 of the disc structure information 1100 .

盘管理信息区域105是如下情况下使用的扩展区域,故下面省略详细说明,该情况为:为了提高信息记录媒体100的可靠性,而记录盘管理信息区域104中所记录的盘管理信息的复制,或者当更新盘管理信息等时不能全部存储在盘管理信息区域104中。另外,记录在交替区域等中的暂时盘管理信息等也一样。The disc management information area 105 is an extended area used in the following case, so detailed description will be omitted below. In this case, a copy of the disc management information recorded in the disc management information area 104 is recorded in order to improve the reliability of the information recording medium 100. , or cannot all be stored in the disk management information area 104 when updating the disk management information or the like. In addition, the same applies to the temporary disk management information and the like recorded in the spare area and the like.

在图1C所示的实例中,由文件系统来执行记录在用户数据区域108上的用户数据的管理。文件系统执行管理的空间被称为卷空间109。In the example shown in FIG. 1C, management of user data recorded on user data area 108 is performed by the file system. The space in which the file system performs management is called volume space 109 .

向卷空间分配了多个逻辑扇区。各逻辑扇区由称为逻辑扇区序号(下面记作LSN)的地址信息进行识别。Multiple logical sectors are allocated to volume space. Each logical sector is identified by address information called a logical sector number (hereinafter referred to as LSN).

在下面的说明中,作为构成文件系统的卷/文件构造,记录在信息记录媒体100中的描述符或指针、元数据分区或元数据文件等只要没有特别详细的记载,就具有ISO/IEC13346标准或UDF(UniversalDisk Format)标准规定的数据构造。当然,也可以使用其它文件系统。In the following description, as the volume/file structure constituting the file system, the descriptors, pointers, metadata partitions, metadata files, etc. recorded in the information recording medium 100 conform to the ISO/IEC13346 standard unless otherwise specified. Or the data structure specified by the UDF (Universal Disk Format) standard. Of course, other file systems may also be used.

另外,图1A-图1C所示的信息记录媒体100作为具有1个记录层的信息记录媒体进行了说明,但也存在具有两个以上记录层的信息记录媒体。In addition, the information recording medium 100 shown in FIG. 1A-FIG. 1C has been demonstrated as an information recording medium having one recording layer, but there is also an information recording medium having two or more recording layers.

图4表示具有两个记录层的信息记录媒体100b的数据构造。FIG. 4 shows the data structure of an information recording medium 100b having two recording layers.

图4中,L0表示第1层,L1表示第2层。第1层和第2层分别具有与信息记录媒体100基本相同的构造。即,导入区域101设置在第1层的最内周侧,导出区域103a设置在第2层的最内周。并且,在第1层的最外周设置外周区域103b,在第2层的最外周设置外周区域103c。导入区域101、外周区域103b、导出区域104a、外周区域103c分别包含盘管理信息区域104、105、104a、105a。In FIG. 4 , L0 represents the first layer, and L1 represents the second layer. The first layer and the second layer each have basically the same structure as the information recording medium 100 . That is, the lead-in area 101 is provided on the innermost peripheral side of the first layer, and the lead-out area 103a is provided on the innermost peripheral side of the second layer. Furthermore, an outer peripheral region 103b is provided on the outermost periphery of the first layer, and an outer peripheral region 103c is provided on the outermost periphery of the second layer. The lead-in area 101, outer peripheral area 103b, lead-out area 104a, and outer peripheral area 103c include disc management information areas 104, 105, 104a, and 105a, respectively.

另外,如图4所示,设置交替区域106、106a、107、107a。各交替区域的容量如上所述,可按每个信息记录媒体进行变更。另外,也可在各交替区域中设置追加的暂时盘管理信息区域。另外,将用户数据区域108、108a处理为具有连续逻辑地址的逻辑上的一个卷空间。In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, alternate regions 106, 106a, 107, 107a are provided. As described above, the capacity of each alternate area can be changed for each information recording medium. In addition, an additional temporary disk management information area may be provided in each alternate area. In addition, the user data areas 108 and 108a are treated as logically one volume space having consecutive logical addresses.

通过上述,可将具有多个记录层的信息记录媒体处理为逻辑上具有一个记录层的信息记录媒体。下面,说明具有一个记录层的信息记录媒体,但这些说明也可适用于具有多个记录层的信息记录媒体。因此,仅在需要特别说明的情况下,才适当说明具有多个记录层的信息记录媒体。Through the above, an information recording medium having a plurality of recording layers can be treated as an information recording medium logically having one recording layer. Next, an information recording medium having one recording layer will be described, but these descriptions can also be applied to an information recording medium having a plurality of recording layers. Therefore, an information recording medium having a plurality of recording layers will be appropriately described only when special explanation is required.

1-2.模拟重写记录1-2. Simulate rewriting records

下面,参照图5A和图5B说明交替信息。Next, alternate information will be described with reference to FIGS. 5A and 5B.

所谓交替信息是指包含交替管理信息(或缺陷列表条目)的交替管理信息列表(或缺陷列表),该交替管理信息包含:表示信息记录媒体上产生了缺陷的簇(缺陷簇)的位置的交替源位置信息、和表示交替该缺陷簇的代替簇的位置的交替目的地位置信息。The so-called alternate information refers to an alternate management information list (or defect list) that includes alternate management information (or defect list entries), and the alternate management information includes: alternate information indicating the position of a cluster (defective cluster) that has a defect on the information recording medium. source position information, and replacement destination position information indicating the position of a replacement cluster to replace the defective cluster.

另外,本发明可在用户数据区域中记录代替簇。In addition, the present invention can record substitute clusters in the user data area.

并且,本发明使用交替信息来实现一次写型信息记录媒体中的模拟重写记录。Also, the present invention uses alternate information to realize pseudo-overwrite recording in a write-once type information recording medium.

如图1B所示,数据区域102包含内周交替区域106、用户数据区域108以及外周交替区域107。As shown in FIG. 1B , the data area 102 includes an inner alternate area 106 , a user data area 108 and an outer alternate area 107 .

内周交替区域106和外周交替区域107中的至少一部分被用作执行记录在用户数据区域108上的数据代替记录的区域。At least a part of the inner alternate area 106 and the outer alternate area 107 is used as an area for performing data replacement recording recorded on the user data area 108 .

例如,在用户数据区域108上存在缺陷簇的情况下,内周交替区域106和外周交替区域107中的至少一部分被用作记录交替了该缺陷簇的代替簇的区域。For example, when there is a defective cluster in the user data area 108, at least a part of the inner alternate area 106 and the outer alternate area 107 is used as an area for recording a replacement cluster in which the defective cluster is alternated.

或者,内周交替区域106和外周交替区域107中的至少一部分被用作记录后述的模拟重写记录中的更新后数据的区域。Alternatively, at least a part of the inner spare area 106 and the outer spare area 107 is used as an area for recording updated data in pseudo-overwrite recording described later.

与检验处理一起实施对交替信息和交替区域进行组合的交替记录。Alternate recording combining alternate information and alternate areas is carried out together with verification processing.

所谓检验处理是如下处理,即:在记录数据之后,再现该数据,比较记录的数据与再现的数据,调查是否正确地记录了数据。将该一连串处理称为写后检验(verify after write)处理。The verification process is a process of reproducing the data after recording the data, comparing the recorded data and the reproduced data, and checking whether the data has been recorded correctly. This series of processing is called verify after write processing.

在检验处理时产生错误的情况下,即在未正确记录数据的情况下,实施交替记录。即,将缺陷簇交替为代替簇,将数据记录在代替簇中。When an error occurs during the verification process, that is, when data is not recorded correctly, alternate recording is performed. That is, defective clusters are replaced with replacement clusters, and data is recorded in the replacement clusters.

将该代替簇记录在内周交替区域106(或外周交替区域107)或用户数据区域108内。This substitute cluster is recorded in the inner spare area 106 (or the outer spare area 107 ) or the user data area 108 .

所谓模拟重写记录是如下方法,即不改变记录了数据的表观上的逻辑地址,将实际记录数据的物理地址映射到其它场所。The so-called pseudo-overwrite recording is a method of mapping a physical address where data is actually recorded to another location without changing the apparent logical address where data is recorded.

并且,在对已记录的逻辑地址指示了数据的重写的情况下,在该重写之前,将新数据记录在记录了数据的物理地址之外的其它物理地址上的ECC簇中,并执行重写前的ECC簇与记录了新数据的代替簇的映射。And, when the rewriting of data is instructed to the recorded logical address, before the rewriting, new data is recorded in the ECC cluster on the physical address other than the physical address where the data is recorded, and execution Mapping between ECC clusters before rewriting and replacement clusters in which new data is recorded.

将该模拟重写记录中的代替簇记录在交替区域或用户数据区域内。The substitute cluster in the pseudo-overwrite recording is recorded in the spare area or the user data area.

作为执行这种映射用的交替信息,使用图5A所示的交替管理信息列表1000。As the replacement information for performing such mapping, the replacement management information list 1000 shown in FIG. 5A is used.

利用这种映射处理,可实现实际上不重写数据、但可模拟重写数据的状态。下面,将这种记录方法称为模拟重写记录。With such mapping processing, it is possible to realize a state in which data is not actually rewritten, but rewriting of data can be simulated. Hereinafter, this recording method is referred to as pseudo-overwrite recording.

图5A表示作为本发明交替信息的交替管理信息列表1000的数据构造。交替管理信息列表1000被用于执行缺陷簇的位置与代替簇的位置的映射。交替管理信息列表1000包含标题信息1001、多个交替管理信息1010(交替管理信息#1、#2、#3...)。FIG. 5A shows the data structure of a replacement management information list 1000 as replacement information of the present invention. The replacement management information list 1000 is used to perform mapping of the positions of defective clusters and replacement clusters. The replacement management information list 1000 includes title information 1001 and a plurality of replacement management information 1010 (alternation management information #1, #2, #3, . . . ).

标题信息1001包含交替管理信息列表1000中所包含的交替管理信息的数量。交替管理信息包含表示上述映射的信息。The header information 1001 includes the number of replacement management information included in the replacement management information list 1000 . The replacement management information includes information indicating the above-mentioned mapping.

图5B表示交替管理信息1010的数据构造。交替管理信息1010包含状态信息1011、交替源位置信息1012、交替目的地位置信息1013。FIG. 5B shows the data structure of the replacement management information 1010. As shown in FIG. The replacement management information 1010 includes status information 1011 , replacement source location information 1012 , and replacement destination location information 1013 .

状态信息1011包含涉及上述映射的状态信息。例如,表示交替管理信息1010的种类或属性、交替源位置信息1012和交替目的地位置信息1013的有效、无效状态等。Status information 1011 includes status information related to the above-mentioned mapping. For example, it indicates the type or attribute of the replacement management information 1010, the valid and invalid states of the replacement source position information 1012 and the replacement destination position information 1013, and the like.

交替源位置信息1012表示交替源的信息(例如缺陷簇)的位置。The replacement source location information 1012 indicates the location of replacement source information (for example, a defect cluster).

交替目的地位置信息1013表示交替目的地的信息(例如代替簇)的位置。Replacement destination position information 1013 indicates the position of replacement destination information (for example, a replacement cluster).

另外,在模拟重写记录的情况下,通过由交替源位置信息1012指示重写前的ECC簇的位置,由交替目的地位置信息1013指示重写后的ECC簇的位置,由此执行映射。Also, in the case of pseudo-overwrite recording, mapping is performed by indicating the position of the ECC cluster before rewriting by the replacement source position information 1012 and indicating the position of the ECC cluster after rewriting by the replacement destination position information 1013 .

这里,登录在交替管理信息1010中的交替源位置信息1012与交替目的地位置信息1013也可以使用对应的ECC簇的开头扇区的物理地址(例如PSN)。这是因为在缺陷管理和模拟重写记录中,以ECC簇为单位进行映射。Here, as the replacement source position information 1012 and the replacement destination position information 1013 registered in the replacement management information 1010, the physical address (for example, PSN) of the head sector of the corresponding ECC cluster may be used. This is because mapping is performed in units of ECC clusters in defect management and pseudo-overwrite recording.

在现有的线性替换(replacement)中,将代替簇记录在交替区域中。由此,始终对交替目的地位置信息1013设定交替区域内的ECC簇的位置信息。In existing linear replacement (replacement), substitute clusters are recorded in alternate areas. Thus, the position information of the ECC cluster in the replacement area is always set in the replacement destination position information 1013 .

另一方面,在本发明中,代替簇不限于交替区域,也可记录在用户数据区域中。因此,可对交替目的地位置信息1013设定表示交替区域内的ECC簇位置的信息、或表示用户数据区域内的ECC簇的位置的信息。On the other hand, in the present invention, the substitute cluster is not limited to the spare area, and may be recorded in the user data area. Therefore, information indicating the position of the ECC cluster in the replacement area or information indicating the position of the ECC cluster in the user data area may be set in the replacement destination position information 1013 .

另外,交替目的地位置信息1013可指示记录在两个区域之一中的ECC簇,所以为了判断交替目的地位置信息1013指示交替区域内的ECC簇、还是交替目的地位置信息1013指示用户数据区域内的ECC簇,而对状态信息1011设置其判断信息。In addition, the replacement destination location information 1013 may indicate an ECC cluster recorded in one of the two areas, so in order to judge whether the replacement destination location information 1013 indicates an ECC cluster in the replacement area or whether the replacement destination location information 1013 indicates a user data area The ECC cluster within the state information 1011 is set to its judgment information.

1-3.记录再现装置1-3. Recording and reproducing device

图6表示本发明实施方式的信息记录再现装置300的构成。FIG. 6 shows the configuration of an information recording and reproducing device 300 according to an embodiment of the present invention.

信息记录再现装置300包含主机装置305和驱动装置310。The information recording and reproducing device 300 includes a host device 305 and a drive device 310 .

主机装置305例如可以是计算机系统或电脑。The host device 305 can be, for example, a computer system or computer.

驱动装置310可以是记录装置、再现装置、记录再现装置之一。也可以将信息记录再现装置300整体称为记录装置、再现装置、记录再现装置。The drive device 310 may be one of a recording device, a reproducing device, and a recording and reproducing device. The information recording and reproducing device 300 as a whole may also be referred to as a recording device, a reproducing device, or a recording and reproducing device.

主机装置305包含系统控制部301与存储器电路302。主机装置305还可包含硬盘驱动器等磁盘装置304。主机装置305内的构成要素经I/O总线303进行相互连接。The host device 305 includes a system control unit 301 and a memory circuit 302 . The host device 305 may also include a magnetic disk device 304 such as a hard disk drive. The components in the host device 305 are connected to each other via the I/O bus 303 .

系统控制部301例如由系统的控制程序或包含运算用存储器的微处理器实现。系统控制部301执行文件系统的卷构造/文件构造的记录、再现、后述的元数据分区/文件构造的记录、再现、文件的记录、再现、导入/导出区域的记录、再现等处理的控制或运算。The system control unit 301 is realized by, for example, a system control program or a microprocessor including a memory for calculation. The system control unit 301 performs control of processes such as recording and playback of volume structure/file structure of the file system, recording and playback of metadata partition/file structure described later, recording and playback of files, recording and playback of lead-in/lead-out areas, etc. OR operation.

存储器电路302用于卷构造、文件构造、元数据分区/文件构造及文件的运算或暂时保存等。The memory circuit 302 is used for volume structure, file structure, metadata partition/file structure, operation and temporary storage of files, and the like.

驱动装置310包含驱动控制部311、存储器电路312与记录再现部314。驱动装置310内的构成要素经内部总线313相互连接。The drive device 310 includes a drive control unit 311 , a memory circuit 312 and a recording and reproducing unit 314 . The components in the drive device 310 are connected to each other via an internal bus 313 .

驱动控制部311例如由驱动器的控制程序或包含运算用存储器的微处理器实现。驱动控制部311执行盘管理信息区域或交替区域的记录、再现、模拟重写记录、再现等处理的控制或运算。The drive control unit 311 is realized by, for example, a control program of a drive or a microprocessor including a memory for calculation. The drive control unit 311 executes control or calculation of processes such as recording, reproduction, pseudo-overwrite recording, and reproduction in the disc management information area or spare area.

图6所示的系统控制部301或驱动控制部311也可由LSI等半导体集成电路来实现,或由通用处理器与存储器(例如ROM)实现。The system control unit 301 or the drive control unit 311 shown in FIG. 6 can also be realized by a semiconductor integrated circuit such as LSI, or by a general-purpose processor and a memory (eg, ROM).

在存储器(例如ROM)中存储了计算机(例如通用处理器)可执行的程序。该程序表示上述和后述的本发明的再现处理和记录处理,计算机(例如通用处理器)根据该程序,执行本发明的再现处理和记录处理。A program executable by a computer (eg, a general-purpose processor) is stored in a memory (eg, ROM). This program represents the playback processing and recording processing of the present invention described above and later, and a computer (for example, a general-purpose processor) executes the playback processing and recording processing of the present invention according to the program.

存储器电路312用于涉及盘管理信息区域或交替区域的数据和传输到驱动装置310的数据的运算或暂时保存等。The memory circuit 312 is used for computation, temporary storage, and the like of data related to the disk management information area or the spare area, and data transferred to the drive device 310 .

1-4.记录处理步骤(1)1-4. Record processing steps (1)

下面,参照图7,说明本实施方式的执行格式化处理后的信息记录媒体100上的数据构造。Next, referring to FIG. 7 , the data structure on the information recording medium 100 after the formatting process according to this embodiment will be described.

向用户数据区域108分配轨道#1401、轨道#2402、轨道#3403。Track #1 401 , track #2 402 , and track #3 403 are assigned to the user data area 108 .

向用户数据区域108分配了卷空间109。向卷空间109内分配了卷构造区域410、物理分区420与卷构造区域411。A volume space 109 is allocated to the user data area 108 . A volume configuration area 410 , a physical partition 420 , and a volume configuration area 411 are allocated in the volume space 109 .

物理分区420内包含UDF标准版本2.5或之后的版本规定的元数据分区430。The physical partition 420 includes a metadata partition 430 specified by UDF standard version 2.5 or later.

物理分区420内记录了元数据文件440。在以后的说明中,为了简化,省略涉及作为元数据文件440的复制的元数据镜像文件的说明,但当然也可以记录元数据镜像文件。A metadata file 440 is recorded in the physical partition 420 . In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the description of the metadata mirror file as the copy of the metadata file 440 will be omitted, but it is of course possible to record the metadata mirror file.

另外,记录了表示元数据文件440在物理分区420中的记录位置的文件条目(FE)、即FE(元数据文件)441。In addition, a file entry (FE) indicating a recording position of a metadata file 440 in the physical partition 420 , that is, an FE (metadata file) 441 is recorded.

将表示用户数据文件的记录位置或容量的FE、或目录文件等文件构造的信息全部配置在元数据分区430、即元数据文件440内。All the file structure information such as the FE indicating the recording position and capacity of the user data file and the directory file are arranged in the metadata partition 430 , that is, the metadata file 440 .

图7中,仅记录了根目录,因此,在元数据文件440中仅记录了文件集合描述符(FSD)443和FE(根)442。另外,为了简化对目录文件的说明,采取包含于各FE内的形式。In FIG. 7 , only the root directory is recorded, and therefore, only the file set descriptor (FSD) 443 and FE (root) 442 are recorded in the metadata file 440 . In addition, in order to simplify the description of the directory file, it is included in each FE.

另外,设此刻处于不执行任何交替记录的状态。元数据分区430中的空区域管理也可以如UDF标准版本2.5规定的那样,利用元数据位图(未图示)来执行。Also, let it be a state where no alternate recording is performed at this time. Empty area management in the metadata partition 430 can also be performed using a metadata bitmap (not shown) as specified in the UDF standard version 2.5.

或者,也可以使元数据分区430的空区域仍保持未记录,而利用轨道#1的LRA405来执行元数据分区430中的空区域管理。Alternatively, the empty area of the metadata partition 430 may remain unrecorded, and the management of the empty area in the metadata partition 430 may be performed using the LRA 405 of track #1.

轨道的分配方法不限于图7所示,例如也可以分配更多的轨道。另外,用户数据区域的最末尾的轨道是可追加新轨道的状态,也可以在必要的时刻追加轨道。The method of allocating tracks is not limited to that shown in FIG. 7 , and more tracks may be allocated, for example. In addition, the last track in the user data area is in a state where a new track can be added, and a track can be added when necessary.

下面,参照图8A所示的流程图,说明本发明中的数据记录步骤。Next, the data recording procedure in the present invention will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 8A.

这里,设将数据文件(File-a)记录在信息记录媒体100中。Here, it is assumed that the data file (File-a) is recorded on the information recording medium 100 .

此外,向信息记录媒体100的用户数据区域108分配了多个逻辑地址与多个物理地址,设该多个逻辑地址与该多个物理地址的对应关系被事先确定。In addition, a plurality of logical addresses and a plurality of physical addresses are allocated to the user data area 108 of the information recording medium 100, and the correspondence relationship between the plurality of logical addresses and the plurality of physical addresses is determined in advance.

该多个逻辑地址分别由例如逻辑扇区序号(LSN)或逻辑块地址(LBA)表示。The plurality of logical addresses are represented by, for example, Logical Sector Number (LSN) or Logical Block Address (LBA), respectively.

该多个物理地址分别由例如物理扇区序号(PSN)或物理块地址(PBA)表示。另外,设向用户数据区域108分配至少一个轨道。The plurality of physical addresses are respectively represented by, for example, a physical sector number (PSN) or a physical block address (PBA). In addition, it is assumed that at least one track is allocated to the user data area 108 .

(步骤S101)在记录数据文件(File-a)之前,驱动控制部311执行数据记录的准备处理。这种数据记录的准备处理例如在将信息记录媒体100加载到驱动装置310时执行。(Step S101 ) Before recording the data file (File-a), the drive control unit 311 executes a preparation process for data recording. This data recording preparation process is executed when the information recording medium 100 is loaded on the drive device 310, for example.

例如,驱动控制部311从信息记录媒体100的盘管理信息区域104(或盘管理信息区域105)中读出最新的盘管理信息。For example, the drive control unit 311 reads the latest disc management information from the disc management information area 104 (or the disc management information area 105 ) of the information recording medium 100 .

为了根据该盘管理信息,确定表示分配给用户数据区域108的多个逻辑地址和多个物理地址的对应关系之初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,取得图3的用户数据区域开始位置信息1103、用户数据区域终端位置信息1104、交替区域信息1105等。In order to determine the initial logical address-physical address mapping representing the correspondence between a plurality of logical addresses assigned to the user data area 108 and a plurality of physical addresses based on the disk management information, the user data area start position information 1103, user data area 1103, and user data area in FIG. Data area terminal position information 1104, replacement area information 1105, and the like.

之后,驱动控制部311根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,执行逻辑地址与初始物理地址的变换。Thereafter, the drive control unit 311 performs conversion between the logical address and the initial physical address based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

另外,驱动控制部311取得包含于盘管理信息中的轨道管理信息。In addition, the drive control unit 311 acquires track management information included in the disc management information.

(步骤S102)驱动控制部311从主机装置305接收记录指示。记录指示包含表示应记录数据的位置的逻辑地址。该逻辑地址例如由逻辑扇区序号(LSN)或逻辑块地址(LBA)表示。记录指示可包含表示应记录单一数据的位置的单一逻辑地址,或包含表示应分别记录多个数据的多个位置的多个逻辑地址。(Step S102 ) The drive control unit 311 receives a recording instruction from the host device 305 . The record indication contains a logical address indicating a location where data should be recorded. The logical address is represented by, for example, a logical sector number (LSN) or a logical block address (LBA). The recording instruction may include a single logical address indicating a location where a single data should be recorded, or a plurality of logical addresses indicating a plurality of locations where a plurality of data should be recorded respectively.

包含于记录指示中的逻辑地址,例如,根据表示在特定轨道内继而可记录数据的位置的逻辑地址(即逻辑NWA),由主机装置305确定。The logical address included in the recording instruction is determined by the host device 305, for example, based on a logical address (ie, a logical NWA) indicating a position within a specific track where data can then be recorded.

例如响应于从主机装置305至驱动装置310的请求,从驱动装置310向主机装置305输出逻辑NWA。Logical NWA is output from drive device 310 to host device 305 , for example in response to a request from host device 305 to drive device 310 .

通过根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,变换根据上述(式1)确定的NWA,由此得到逻辑NWA。这种变换由驱动控制部311执行。NWA和逻辑NWA的确定步骤在后述的实施方式2中详细说明。The logical NWA is obtained by transforming the NWA determined according to the above (Equation 1) according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping. This conversion is performed by the drive control unit 311 . The steps for determining NWA and logical NWA will be described in detail in Embodiment 2 described later.

主机装置305的系统控制部301在记录数据文件(File-a)之后,执行必要的文件系统信息的生成或更新。例如,系统控制部301对存储器电路302执行对数据文件(File-a)的FE(File-a)的生成、或对作为数据文件(File-a)的母目录的根目录进行更新。The system control unit 301 of the host device 305 executes creation or update of necessary file system information after recording the data file (File-a). For example, the system control unit 301 executes generation of FE (File-a) for the data file (File-a) on the memory circuit 302 or updates the root directory which is the parent directory of the data file (File-a).

通过从主机装置305向驱动装置310输出记录指示,将如上所述生成的对数据文件(File-a)的FE(File-a)或更新后的根目录记录在信息记录媒体100中,并反映最新文件系统信息。By outputting a recording instruction from the host device 305 to the drive device 310, the FE (File-a) of the data file (File-a) generated as described above or the updated root directory is recorded in the information recording medium 100 and reflected. Up-to-date file system information.

另外,主机装置305在必要时,使用规定指令,询问驱动装置310是否残留了用于执行交替记录的未记录区域等。In addition, the host device 305 inquires of the drive device 310 whether or not there is an unrecorded area for performing alternate recording, etc., using a predetermined command as necessary.

另外,从主机装置305输出到驱动装置310的指示也可以是SCSI多媒体指令等标准化后的指令。In addition, the instructions output from the host device 305 to the drive device 310 may be standardized commands such as SCSI multimedia commands.

例如,逻辑NWA的请求或记录指示也可以分别是读出轨道信息(READ TRACK INFORMATION)指令或写入(WRITE)指令。For example, the request or recording instruction of the logical NWA may also be a read track information (READ TRACK INFORMATION) instruction or a write (WRITE) instruction, respectively.

(步骤S103)驱动控制部311根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将步骤S102中接收到的记录指示中所包含的逻辑地址变换为物理地址。(Step S103 ) The drive control unit 311 converts the logical address included in the recording instruction received in step S102 into a physical address based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

(步骤S104)驱动控制部311根据对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址和盘管理信息中包含的轨道管理信息210(图2B),确定分配给用户数据区域108的至少一个轨道中的一个轨道(开放轨道)。(Step S104) The drive control unit 311 determines, based on the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction and the track management information 210 (FIG. 2B) included in the disc management information, that in at least one track allocated to the user data area 108, A track (open track) of .

驱动控制部311根据该确定的轨道的LRA213,确定表示该确定的轨道内继而可记录数据的位置的物理地址(即NWA)。该NWA例如是根据上述(式1)确定的下次可记录地址。Based on the LRA 213 of the specified track, the drive control unit 311 specifies a physical address (that is, NWA) indicating a position within the specified track where data can be recorded next. This NWA is, for example, the next recordable address determined from the above (Formula 1).

另外,NWA的确定可在步骤S104中执行,但也可以在其它步骤中执行。例如,也可以在上述数据记录的准备处理中事先执行。In addition, the determination of NWA may be performed in step S104, but may also be performed in other steps. For example, it may be performed in advance in the preparation process for the above-mentioned data recording.

这里,通过使用LRA213算出NWA,由此可不必将NWA的信息保存在轨道管理信息中,即可简化轨道管理信息的数据构造。Here, by using the LRA213 to calculate the NWA, the data structure of the orbit management information can be simplified without storing the information of the NWA in the orbit management information.

(步骤S105)驱动控制部311确定对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址是否比NWA小。(Step S105) The drive control section 311 determines whether or not the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction is smaller than the NWA.

在确定为对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址比NWA小的情况下,将该记录指示确定为是对用户数据区域108中的已记录区域的记录指示。即,确定为记录指示的数据记录是模拟重写记录。此时,处理前进到步骤S106。否则,处理前进到步骤S108。When it is determined that the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction is smaller than the NWA, the recording instruction is specified as a recording instruction to the recorded area in the user data area 108 . That is, the data record determined to be the record indication is a pseudo-overwrite record. At this time, the process advances to step S106. Otherwise, the process advances to step S108.

(步骤S106)驱动控制部311确定应记录的数据。在信息记录媒体100中的数据记录单位是ECC簇的情况下,驱动控制部311将由记录指示指定的数据确定为应记录的数据。例如,在由记录指示指定的数据的记录位置和容量与ECC簇边界一致的情况下,改写ECC簇整体,所以将由记录指示指定的数据本身确定为应记录的数据。(Step S106) The drive control unit 311 specifies data to be recorded. When the data recording unit on the information recording medium 100 is an ECC cluster, the drive control unit 311 specifies the data designated by the recording instruction as the data to be recorded. For example, when the recording position and capacity of the data specified by the recording instruction coincide with the ECC cluster boundary, the entire ECC cluster is rewritten, so the data itself specified by the recording instruction is determined as the data to be recorded.

在不一致的情况下,驱动控制部311执行后述的读、更改、写处理。此时,驱动控制部311将在读、更改、写处理过程中得到的ECC簇单位的数据确定为应记录的数据。If they do not match, the drive control unit 311 executes read, change, and write processes described later. At this time, the drive control unit 311 specifies the data in units of ECC clusters obtained during the read, change, and write processes as data to be recorded.

(步骤S107)驱动控制部311确定由步骤S106确定的应记录的数据的记录位置。具体而言,驱动控制部311将对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址所示位置以外的特定位置、即用户数据区域108中的特定位置确定为由步骤S106确定的应记录数据的记录位置。(Step S107) The drive control unit 311 determines the recording position of the data to be recorded determined in Step S106. Specifically, the drive control unit 311 specifies a specific position other than the position indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction, that is, a specific position in the user data area 108, as the data to be recorded determined in step S106. Record location.

这里,该特定位置也可以是步骤S104中确定的轨道内的NWA。Here, the specific position may also be the NWA within the track determined in step S104.

或者,该特定位置也可以是与步骤S104中确定的轨道不同的开放轨道内的NWA。此时,该开放轨道内的NWA最好表示这样的位置,该位置最接近由对应于记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址所表示的位置。Alternatively, the specific position may also be an NWA in an open track different from the track determined in step S104. At this time, the NWA within the open track preferably indicates the position closest to the position indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction.

(步骤S108)驱动控制部311确定对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址是否等于NWA。在确定为对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址等于NWA的情况下,将该记录指示确定为是对NWA所示的位置的记录指示。即,确定为记录指示的数据记录是补写(新记录)。此时,处理前进到步骤S109。否则,处理前进到步骤S111。(Step S108) The drive control section 311 determines whether the physical address corresponding to the logical address contained in the recording instruction is equal to NWA. When it is determined that the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction is equal to NWA, the recording instruction is determined to be a recording instruction for the location indicated by NWA. That is, the data recording specified as the recording instruction is overwriting (new recording). At this time, the process advances to step S109. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S111.

(步骤S109)驱动控制部311确定应记录的数据。具体而言,驱动控制部311将由记录指示指定的数据确定为应记录的数据。(Step S109) The drive control unit 311 specifies data to be recorded. Specifically, the drive control unit 311 specifies the data designated by the recording instruction as the data to be recorded.

此时,驱动控制部311判断由记录指示指定的数据终端是否与ECC簇边界一致。在不一致的情况下,插入填充数据(例如全部为00h的数据),使数据的终端与ECC簇边界一致,并确定为应记录的数据。At this time, the drive control unit 311 judges whether or not the end of the data designated by the recording instruction coincides with the ECC cluster boundary. In the case of inconsistency, padding data (for example, data of all 00h) is inserted so that the end of the data coincides with the ECC cluster boundary, and is determined as data to be recorded.

(步骤S110)驱动控制部311确定由步骤S109确定的应记录的数据的记录位置。具体而言,驱动控制部311将由对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址所示的位置(即由NWA所示的位置)确定为由步骤S109确定的应记录数据的记录位置。(Step S110) The drive control unit 311 determines the recording position of the data to be recorded determined in Step S109. Specifically, the drive control unit 311 specifies the position indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction (that is, the position indicated by NWA) as the recording position of the data specified in step S109.

(步骤S111)驱动控制部311执行错误处理。(Step S111) The drive control unit 311 executes error processing.

(步骤S112)驱动控制部311执行向确定的记录位置的记录处理。(Step S112 ) The drive control unit 311 executes the recording process to the specified recording position.

在步骤S105的判定为‘是’的情况下,驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以将步骤S106中确定的应记录数据记录在步骤S107中确定的记录位置上。When the determination in step S105 is YES, the drive control unit 311 controls the recording/reproducing unit 314 so as to record the data to be recorded determined in step S106 at the recording position determined in step S107.

在步骤S108的判定为‘是’的情况下,驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以将步骤S109中确定的应记录数据记录在步骤S110中确定的记录位置上。When the determination in step S108 is YES, the drive control unit 311 controls the recording/reproducing unit 314 so as to record the data to be recorded determined in step S109 at the recording position determined in step S110.

并且,驱动控制部311通过对记录的数据执行检验处理,确定该数据的记录是否成功。在该数据的记录成功的情况下,处理前进到步骤S113。Also, the drive control section 311 determines whether or not the recording of the data was successful by performing a verification process on the recorded data. When the recording of the data has succeeded, the process proceeds to step S113.

在该数据的记录失败的情况下,分配内周交替区域106等交替区域和用户数据区域108的任一区域中的未记录区域作为代替簇,并在该代替簇中记录数据。If recording of the data fails, an unrecorded area in any of the spare areas such as the inner spare area 106 and the user data area 108 is allocated as a substitute cluster, and data is recorded in the substitute cluster.

在该数据的记录最终成功之后,处理前进到步骤S113。After the recording of this data finally succeeds, the process proceeds to step S113.

上述步骤S106和步骤S112的处理也可通过读、更改、写处理(下面称为RWM处理)实现。The above-mentioned processing of step S106 and step S112 can also be realized by read, modify, write processing (hereinafter referred to as RWM processing).

在RMW处理中,首先,驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以再现记录在ECC簇中的数据,该ECC簇包含:位于由对应于记录指示所包含的逻辑地址的物理地址所示的位置上的物理扇区,将从该ECC簇再现的数据存储在存储器电路312中(读处理)。In the RMW processing, first, the drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 to reproduce data recorded in an ECC cluster including a location indicated by a physical address corresponding to a logical address included in the recording instruction. data reproduced from the ECC cluster is stored in the memory circuit 312 (read processing).

在执行该再现处理的时刻,可交替记录再现目的地的ECC簇。因此,驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以参照交替管理信息列表1000,必要时再现记录在交替目的地的ECC簇中的数据。参照交替管理信息列表1000的数据再现步骤如后所述。At the time of execution of this reproduction process, the ECC cluster of the reproduction destination can be alternately recorded. Therefore, the drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 to refer to the replacement management information list 1000 and reproduce the data recorded in the ECC cluster of the replacement destination as necessary. The data reproduction procedure referring to the replacement management information list 1000 will be described later.

其次,驱动控制部311将从ECC簇再现的数据中的、记录在位于对应于记录指示中所包含的逻辑地址的物理地址所示的位置上的物理扇区中的数据、置换成记录指示所指定的数据(更改处理)。结果,得到更新后的ECC簇的数据。Next, the drive control unit 311 replaces the data recorded in the physical sector at the position indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction, among the data reproduced from the ECC cluster, with the data indicated by the recording instruction. Specified data (change processing). As a result, data of the updated ECC cluster is obtained.

驱动控制部311在步骤S106实施读处理和更改处理。The drive control unit 311 executes read processing and modification processing in step S106.

图8B表示图8A所示的步骤S106中执行读处理和更改处理时实施的步骤。图8B所示的各步骤由驱动装置310的驱动控制部311执行。FIG. 8B shows the steps performed when the read processing and the modification processing are executed in step S106 shown in FIG. 8A. Each step shown in FIG. 8B is executed by the drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 .

(步骤S151)驱动控制部311确定是否已将包含由记录指示指定的位置的ECC簇交替为代替簇。这种确定例如通过检索交替管理信息列表1000来执行。(Step S151) The drive control section 311 determines whether or not the ECC cluster including the position specified by the recording instruction has been alternated as a replacement cluster. This determination is performed, for example, by retrieving the alternation management information list 1000 .

当发现将记录指示所指定的位置表示为交替源的交替管理信息1010时,确定为已交替为代替簇,处理前进到步骤S152A。否则,处理前进到步骤S152B。When the replacement management information 1010 indicating the location specified by the recording instruction as the replacement source is found, it is determined that the replacement cluster has been replaced, and the process proceeds to step S152A. Otherwise, the process advances to step S152B.

也可以保持步骤S151的判定结果,作为内部变量的值,在其它步骤中需要时,通过参照该内部变量的值,确定是否已将包含由记录指示指定的位置的ECC簇交替为代替簇。由此,可避免重复执行相同的处理。例如,在步骤S151的判定结果为‘是’的情况下,保持“1”,作为该内部变量的值,在步骤S151的判定结果为‘否’的情况下,保持“0”,作为其内部变量的值。The determination result of step S151 may also be held as an internal variable value, and when necessary in other steps, by referring to the value of the internal variable, it is determined whether the ECC cluster including the position specified by the recording instruction has been replaced as a replacement cluster. Thus, repeated execution of the same processing can be avoided. For example, if the determination result of step S151 is 'Yes', hold "1" as the value of the internal variable, and if the determination result of step S151 is 'No', hold "0" as the value of the internal variable the value of the variable.

(步骤S152A)驱动控制部311确定是否需要RMW处理。例如,在由记录指示指定的数据位置和尺寸与ECC簇边界一致的情况下,驱动控制部311确定为不需要RWM处理;在由记录指示指定的数据位置和尺寸与ECC簇边界不一致的情况下,驱动控制部311确定为需要RWM处理。(Step S152A) The drive control section 311 determines whether RMW processing is necessary. For example, when the data position and size specified by the recording instruction coincide with the ECC cluster boundary, the drive control unit 311 determines that RWM processing is not required; when the data position and size specified by the recording instruction do not coincide with the ECC cluster boundary , the drive control unit 311 determines that RWM processing is necessary.

在确定为需要RMW处理的情况下,处理前进到步骤S153,否则,处理前进到步骤S157。In a case where it is determined that RMW processing is necessary, the process proceeds to step S153, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S157.

与步骤S151一样,也可以保持步骤S152A的判定结果,作为内部变量的值,在其它步骤中需要时,参照该内部变量的值,确定是否必需RMW处理。Like step S151, the determination result of step S152A may also be kept as an internal variable value, and when necessary in other steps, refer to the value of this internal variable to determine whether RMW processing is necessary.

(步骤S152B)驱动控制部311确定是否必需RMW处理。步骤S152B的处理与步骤S152A的处理相同。(Step S152B) The drive control section 311 determines whether RMW processing is necessary. The processing of step S152B is the same as the processing of step S152A.

在确定为必需RMW处理的情况下,处理前进到步骤S154,否则,处理前进到步骤S157。In a case where it is determined that RMW processing is necessary, the process proceeds to step S154, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S157.

(步骤S153)驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以代替包含由记录指示指定的位置的ECC簇,再现记录在步骤S151发现的交替管理信息1010所示的代替簇中的数据,并将再现的数据存储在存储器电路312中。(Step S153) The drive control section 311 controls the recording reproduction section 314 to replace the ECC cluster containing the position specified by the recording instruction, reproduce the data recorded in the replacement cluster shown in the replacement management information 1010 found in step S151, and reproduce The data of is stored in the memory circuit 312.

(步骤S154)驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以对记录在包含由记录指示指定的位置的ECC簇中的数据进行再现,并将再现的数据存储在存储器电路312中。(Step S154 ) The drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 to reproduce the data recorded in the ECC cluster including the position specified by the recording instruction, and store the reproduced data in the memory circuit 312 .

(步骤S155)驱动控制部311用记录指示所指定的数据来置换所再现的数据,由此生成修正后的数据。(Step S155) The drive control unit 311 replaces the reproduced data with the data designated by the recording instruction, thereby generating corrected data.

(步骤S156)驱动控制部311将修正后的数据确定为应记录在信息记录媒体100中的数据。(Step S156 ) The drive control unit 311 specifies the corrected data as data to be recorded on the information recording medium 100 .

(步骤S157)驱动控制部311将由记录指示指定的数据确定为应记录在信息记录媒体100中的数据。(Step S157 ) The drive control unit 311 specifies the data designated by the recording instruction as the data to be recorded on the information recording medium 100 .

如上所述,完成读处理和更改处理。As described above, read processing and change processing are completed.

第3,驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以将更改处理中得到的更新后的ECC簇的数据记录在最初的ECC簇的位置上(写处理)。驱动控制部311在步骤S112中实施写处理。Third, the drive control unit 311 controls the recording/reproducing unit 314 so that the data of the updated ECC cluster obtained in the modification process is recorded in the position of the first ECC cluster (writing process). The drive control unit 311 performs writing processing in step S112.

但是,在本发明中,由于信息记录媒体是一次写型媒体,所以实际上不能记录在最初的ECC簇的位置上。However, in the present invention, since the information recording medium is a write-once medium, it cannot actually be recorded at the position of the first ECC cluster.

其中,分配内周交替区域106等交替区域和用户数据区域108中任一区域的未记录区域作为代替簇,在该代替簇中记录更新后的数据。Here, an unrecorded area in any one of the spare area such as the inner spare area 106 and the user data area 108 is allocated as a substitute cluster, and updated data is recorded in the substitute cluster.

并且,驱动控制部311通过对记录后的数据执行检验处理,确定该数据的记录是否成功。在该数据的记录成功的情况下,处理前进到步骤S113。Also, the drive control unit 311 determines whether or not the recording of the data has been successful by performing verification processing on the recorded data. When the recording of the data has succeeded, the process proceeds to step S113.

在数据记录失败的情况下,分配内周交替区域106等交替区域和用户数据区域108中任一区域的未记录区域并作为再一代替簇,并在进一步的代替簇中记录数据。If data recording fails, an unrecorded area in any of the spare areas such as the inner spare area 106 and the user data area 108 is assigned as yet another replacement cluster, and data is recorded in the further replacement cluster.

在该数据的记录最终成功之后,处理前进到步骤S113。After the recording of this data finally succeeds, the process proceeds to step S113.

在由记录指示指定的区域对应于ECC簇整体的情况下,由于改写全部ECC簇,所以不需要上述读处理。When the area designated by the recording instruction corresponds to the entire ECC cluster, since the entire ECC cluster is rewritten, the above-mentioned read processing is unnecessary.

(步骤S113)驱动控制部311对应于步骤S112的处理,生成交替管理信息1010,将该交替管理信息存储在存储器电路312中。例如,在步骤S112中,驱动控制部311在控制记录再现部314以将数据记录在由对应于该记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址所示的位置以外的特定位置、即用户数据区域108中的特定位置中时,驱动控制部311生成将对应于该记录指示中所包含的逻辑地址的物理地址映射到表示该特定位置的物理地址的交替管理信息1010。(Step S113 ) The drive control unit 311 generates the replacement management information 1010 corresponding to the processing of the step S112 , and stores the replacement management information in the memory circuit 312 . For example, in step S112, the drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 to record data in a specific location other than the location indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address contained in the recording instruction, that is, the user data area 108. When it is at a specific position in the recording instruction, the drive control unit 311 generates alternate management information 1010 that maps the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction to the physical address indicating the specific position.

也可以通过检索现有的交替管理信息列表1000,确定是否在现有的交替管理信息列表1000中发现了交替管理信息1010,该交替管理信息1010具有:与对应于记录指示中所包含的逻辑地址的物理地址相同的交替源位置信息1012。It is also possible to determine whether the replacement management information 1010 is found in the existing replacement management information list 1000 by retrieving the existing replacement management information list 1000. Alternate source location information 1012 with the same physical address.

在发现的情况下,驱动控制部311更新该交替管理信息1010,以将表示该特定位置的物理地址设定为新的交替目的地位置信息1013。If found, the drive control unit 311 updates the replacement management information 1010 so as to set the physical address indicating the specific position as the new replacement destination position information 1013 .

在未发现的情况下,驱动控制部311生成新的交替管理信息1010,将该新的交替管理信息1010追加到交替管理信息列表1000中。If not found, the drive control unit 311 generates new replacement management information 1010 and adds the new replacement management information 1010 to the replacement management information list 1000 .

接着,驱动控制部311执行交替管理信息列表1000的重新排列。例如,驱动控制部311也可以对状态信息1011执行交替管理信息列表1000的重新排列,之后,对交替源位置信息1012的物理地址执行交替管理信息列表1000的重新排列。Next, the drive control unit 311 rearranges the replacement management information list 1000 . For example, the drive control unit 311 may rearrange the replacement management information list 1000 for the status information 1011 and then rearrange the replacement management information list 1000 for the physical address of the replacement source location information 1012 .

如此,生成包含将对应于记录指示所包含的逻辑地址之物理地址映射到表示该特定位置的物理地址的交替管理信息1010的新交替管理信息列表1000。In this way, a new replacement management information list 1000 including replacement management information 1010 that maps the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction to the physical address indicating the specific position is generated.

(步骤S114)驱动控制部311更新盘管理信息,以反映上述记录动作。例如,驱动控制部311更新最终数据记录位置信息1107。另外,驱动控制部311为了反映最新的记录状态,更新对应于记录了数据的轨道的轨道管理信息210内的LRA213。(Step S114) The drive control unit 311 updates the disk management information to reflect the recording operation described above. For example, the drive control unit 311 updates the last data recording location information 1107 . In addition, the drive control unit 311 updates the LRA 213 in the track management information 210 corresponding to the track on which the data is recorded to reflect the latest recording status.

并且,驱动控制部311生成包含新交替管理信息列表1000或轨道管理信息210等更新后信息的新的盘管理信息。另外,为了表示新交替管理信息列表1000或轨道管理信息210在信息记录媒体100上的最新记录位置,设定包含于新的盘管理信息中的交替管理信息列表位置信息1102或区段管理信息位置信息1109。Then, the drive control unit 311 generates new disk management information including updated information such as the new replacement management information list 1000 and the track management information 210 . In addition, in order to indicate the latest recording position of the new alternate management information list 1000 or the track management information 210 on the information recording medium 100, the alternate management information list position information 1102 or the session management information position information included in the new disc management information is set. Information 1109.

驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以在信息记录媒体100上的规定区域(例如暂时盘管理信息区域)中记录新的盘管理信息。如此,将盘管理信息更新为最新的状态。The drive control unit 311 controls the recording/reproducing unit 314 to record new disc management information in a predetermined area (for example, a temporary disc management information area) on the information recording medium 100 . In this way, the disk management information is updated to the latest state.

另外,也可以在数据记录结束之后,驱动装置310将上述记录动作的结果通知给主机装置305。所谓记录动作的结果例如是表示数据记录成功或数据记录失败的信息。In addition, after data recording is completed, the drive device 310 may notify the host device 305 of the result of the recording operation. The result of the recording operation is, for example, information indicating success or failure of data recording.

在规定定时将这种通知发送给主机装置305。例如,也可在步骤S108结束时或步骤S112中产生错误时将这种通知发送给主机装置305。或者,也可以在数据记录实际结束之前将这种通知发送给主机装置305。例如,驱动装置310也可以从主机装置305接收记录指示,在能够正确解释该记录指示的时刻,将表示记录结束的通知发送给主机装置305亦可。Such a notification is sent to the host device 305 at a predetermined timing. For example, such a notification may be sent to the host device 305 at the end of step S108 or when an error occurs in step S112. Alternatively, such a notification may be sent to the host device 305 before the data recording actually ends. For example, the drive device 310 may receive a recording instruction from the host device 305, and may transmit a notification indicating completion of recording to the host device 305 when the recording instruction can be correctly interpreted.

另外,在上述交替记录处理中,也可以从交替源的ECC簇的位置起、沿PSN变大的方向检索未记录区域。在这种检索中,若发现了未记录区域,则分配该未记录区域,作为代替簇。In addition, in the alternate recording process described above, an unrecorded area may be searched from the position of the ECC cluster of the alternate source in a direction in which the PSN becomes larger. In such a search, if an unrecorded area is found, the unrecorded area is assigned as a replacement cluster.

另外,也可以首先在包含交替源簇的轨道内检索未记录区域,之后,从该轨道起,沿PSN变大的方向,依次检索各轨道内的未记录区域。In addition, it is also possible to first search for an unrecorded area in a track including an alternate source cluster, and then sequentially search for an unrecorded area in each track from this track in a direction in which the PSN becomes larger.

当仍未发现未记录区域而未记录区域的检索到达用户数据区域108的终端时,也可以在承接该用户数据区域108的区域、即外周交替区域107检索未记录区域。When no unrecorded area is found yet and the search for the unrecorded area reaches the end of the user data area 108 , the unrecorded area may be searched for in the area succeeding the user data area 108 , that is, the peripheral spare area 107 .

并且,当仍未发现未记录区域而未记录区域的检索到达交替区域107的终端时,也可以从信息记录媒体100内周侧的规定位置(例如内周交替区域106的开头、用户数据区域108的开头、或距离这些开头规定距离的位置)起、PSN变大地检索未记录区域。And, when the unrecorded area has not been found yet and the retrieval of the unrecorded area reaches the end of the spare area 107, it is also possible to start from a predetermined position on the inner peripheral side of the information recording medium 100 (for example, the beginning of the inner peripheral alternate area 106, the user data area 108, etc.). from the beginning of , or a predetermined distance away from these beginnings), the PSN becomes larger and the unrecorded area is searched.

在数据记录步骤的步骤S105和步骤S108中,通过比较对应于记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址与NWA,确定该数据记录是模拟重写记录还是补写。In step S105 and step S108 of the data recording step, by comparing the physical address corresponding to the logical address contained in the recording instruction with the NWA, it is determined whether the data recording is a simulated overwrite recording or a post-write.

可利用这种比较处理来确定该数据记录是模拟重写记录还是补写是因为,信息记录媒体100是一次写型信息记录媒体,并且对该一次写型信息记录媒体执行按序记录的缘故。This comparison process can be used to determine whether the data recording is a pseudo-overwrite recording or post-writing because the information recording medium 100 is a write-once information recording medium and sequential recording is performed on the write-once information recording medium.

本发明所述的、使用了用户数据区域的交替记录也可以适用于改写型光盘。但是,在改写型光盘的情况下,为了确定该数据记录是重写记录还是补写(或新记录),必需更复杂的处理步骤。这是因为,在改写型光盘的情况下,光盘上的任意场所均可随机改写的缘故。The alternate recording using the user data area described in the present invention can also be applied to rewritable optical discs. However, in the case of a rewritable optical disc, more complicated processing steps are required to determine whether the data recording is a rewrite recording or a rewriting (or new recording). This is because, in the case of a rewritable optical disc, arbitrary locations on the optical disc can be rewritten randomly.

如上述实施方式所示,若驱动装置执行改写型光盘上的空区域管理,则如背景技术的说明所述,例如必需利用SDL来管理对应于改写型光盘上的全部ECC簇的交替管理信息。而且,向某个改写型光盘上的用户数据区域中的某个场所记录数据是重写记录还是新记录,例如必需检索全部交替管理信息列表1000,并判断是否已记录完成。同样,为了知道是否未将某个ECC簇用作代替簇,必需检索全部交替管理信息列表1000。这种处理的处理量随着交替管理信息列表1000的容量而增大,对于容量日渐增大的光盘而言是较大的课题。As in the above-mentioned embodiments, if the drive device executes free area management on the rewritable optical disc, as described in the background art, for example, SDL must be used to manage the replacement management information corresponding to all ECC clusters on the rewritable optical disc. In addition, whether data is to be recorded in a certain place in the user data area on a certain rewritable optical disc is overwrite recording or new recording, for example, it is necessary to search all replacement management information lists 1000 and determine whether the recording has been completed. Also, in order to know whether a certain ECC cluster is not used as a substitute cluster, it is necessary to search all the replacement management information lists 1000 . The amount of such processing increases with the capacity of the replacement management information list 1000, which is a big problem for an optical disc whose capacity is increasing day by day.

另一方面,在本发明中,由于是一次写型信息记录媒体,按序记录,所以保证在某个轨道内,具有比NWA小的地址值的区域已全部记录完成。On the other hand, in the present invention, since it is a write-once information recording medium and records sequentially, it is guaranteed that all areas with address values smaller than NWA have been recorded in a certain track.

由此,利用步骤S105和108的比较处理,无论交替管理信息列表1000的容量如何,均可以简单执行数据记录是模拟重写记录还是补写的确定。另外,由于代替簇也只要从NWA之后的位置选择即可,故可容易地选择。Thus, with the comparison processing in steps S105 and S108, regardless of the capacity of the replacement management information list 1000, it is possible to easily determine whether the data recording is a pseudo-overwrite recording or overwriting. In addition, since the replacement cluster only needs to be selected from the position after the NWA, it can be easily selected.

另外,在一次写型光盘的随机记录方式中执行模拟重写记录的情况也与改写型光盘的情况一样。In addition, the case of performing pseudo-overwrite recording in the random recording method of the write-once optical disc is the same as that of the rewritable optical disc.

并且,在一次写型光盘的随机记录方式的情况下,必需上述空区域管理信息220等特别的构造。与按序记录方式的空区域管理相比,随机记录方式的空区域管理信息220对驱动控制部311的处理负荷大幅度增大。In addition, in the case of the random recording method of the write-once optical disc, a special structure such as the above-mentioned free area management information 220 is required. Compared with the free area management of the sequential recording method, the processing load of the free area management information 220 of the random recording method on the drive control unit 311 is greatly increased.

尤其是在按序记录方式下,可将开放轨道的数量限制到不损害对文件系统的便利性的程度(例如最大为4个)。Especially in the sequential recording method, the number of open tracks can be limited to an extent that does not impair the convenience of the file system (for example, a maximum of four).

此时,开放轨道的数量取决于文件系统的构造,即便光盘的容量增加也不受影响,但另一方面,随机记录的空区域管理信息220随着光盘的容量增加,其容量也增加,处理负荷增大。At this time, the number of open tracks depends on the structure of the file system, and will not be affected even if the capacity of the optical disc increases. The load increases.

即,对于容量日渐增加的光盘而言,在按序记录方式下执行模拟重写方式的本发明的效果非常大。That is, for optical discs whose capacity is increasing day by day, the effect of the present invention in which the pseudo-overwriting method is performed in the sequential recording method is very large.

另外,为了确定是模拟重写记录还是补写,根据包含于最新的轨道管理信息210中的LRA213与(式1)来确定NWA是发明的特征。In addition, it is a feature of the invention to determine NWA based on LRA 213 included in the latest track management information 210 and (Equation 1) in order to determine whether to perform pseudo-overwrite recording or overwriting.

通过将利用数据记录更新后的LRA213记录在盘上,而将信息记录媒体100加载到驱动装置310上时,发现最新的LRA213的时间变快。When the LRA 213 updated by data recording is recorded on the disk and the information recording medium 100 is loaded on the drive device 310, the time to find the latest LRA 213 is shortened.

通过使用LRA213来算出NWA,不必将NWA的信息保存在轨道管理信息中,即可简化轨道管理信息的数据构造。By calculating the NWA using the LRA 213, the data structure of the orbit management information can be simplified without storing the information of the NWA in the orbit management information.

若不根据本发明,则为了确定是模拟重写记录还是补写,例如需要如下步骤。If it is not according to the present invention, in order to determine whether to simulate overwrite recording or overwrite, for example, the following steps are required.

即,必须确定包含对应于记录指示中包含的逻辑地址之物理地址的轨道,从该轨道的开头依次调查ECC簇,并判断是否已记录。That is, it is necessary to identify a track including a physical address corresponding to a logical address included in a recording instruction, search the ECC clusters sequentially from the head of the track, and determine whether or not recording has been made.

若记录指示的位置的ECC簇已记录完成,则确定为是模拟重写记录。If the ECC cluster at the location indicated by the recording has been recorded, it is determined to be the simulated overwrite recording.

这种处理尤其是在轨道的容量变大时,导致处理量也变大,不理想。Such processing, especially when the capacity of the track increases, leads to an increase in the amount of processing, which is not preferable.

另一方面,根据本实施方式,不管轨道的容量如何,均能够较容易地确定是模拟重写记录还是补写。On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, regardless of the capacity of the track, it is possible to relatively easily determine whether to perform pseudo-overwrite recording or overwriting.

另外,通过使LRA213包含于轨道管理信息210内,在驱动器10接收到记录指示时,确定记录目的地的轨道,并可容易地确定NWA。In addition, by including the LRA 213 in the track management information 210, when the drive 10 receives a recording instruction, the track of the recording destination can be specified, and the NWA can be easily specified.

图9表示利用这种记录步骤记录了数据文件后的信息记录媒体100上的数据构造。FIG. 9 shows the data structure on the information recording medium 100 after the data file is recorded by this recording procedure.

图9中,说明数据文件(File-a)460,作为数据文件的一例。设在数据文件(File-a)460中,在上述记录步骤中检测出缺陷簇#1与缺陷簇#2。In FIG. 9, the data file (File-a) 460 is demonstrated as an example of a data file. Assume that in the data file (File-a) 460, defective cluster #1 and defective cluster #2 are detected in the recording step.

因此,设将包含表示将缺陷簇#1交替为代替簇#1的交替管理信息、和表示将缺陷簇#2交替为代替簇#2的交替管理信息的盘管理信息记录在盘管理信息区域104中。Therefore, it is assumed that disk management information including replacement management information indicating replacement of defective cluster #1 with replacement cluster #1 and replacement management information indicating replacement of defective cluster #2 with replacement cluster #2 is recorded in the disk management information area 104. middle.

如图9所示,将代替簇#1记录在交替区域106中,将代替簇#3记录在用户数据区域108中。As shown in FIG. 9 , the replacement cluster #1 is recorded in the spare area 106 , and the replacement cluster #3 is recorded in the user data area 108 .

并且,数据文件(File-a)460在执行了该记录之后,利用模拟重写记录,更新内容。And, after the data file (File-a) 460 has executed this recording, it updates the content by using the simulated overwrite recording.

具体而言,更新簇#2和更新簇#4的部分相当于基于模拟重写记录的更新部分。Specifically, the updated cluster #2 and the updated cluster #4 correspond to the updated section recorded by the simulated overwrite.

设将利用模拟重写记录更新后的新数据分别记录在作为代替分配了更新簇#2和更新簇#4的代替簇#2和代替簇#4中,将对应的交替信息记录在盘管理信息区域104中。Assume that the new data updated by the simulated overwrite recording is recorded in the replacement cluster #2 and the replacement cluster #4 to which the update cluster #2 and the update cluster #4 are assigned as replacements, respectively, and the corresponding replacement information is recorded in the disk management information. in area 104.

如图9所示,将代替簇#2分配给交替区域106,将代替簇#4分配给用户数据区域108。As shown in FIG. 9 , the replacement cluster #2 is assigned to the spare area 106 , and the replacement cluster #4 is assigned to the user data area 108 .

1-5.再现处理步骤(1)1-5. Reproduction processing procedure (1)

参照图10的流程图来说明文件的再现处理。这里,以再现图9所示的数据文件(File-a)460的动作为例进行说明。File playback processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 10 . Here, the operation of reproducing the data file (File-a) 460 shown in FIG. 9 will be described as an example.

(步骤S201)在数据再现之前,驱动控制部311执行数据再现的准备处理。这种数据再现的准备处理例如在将信息记录媒体100加载到驱动装置310上时执行。例如,驱动控制部311从信息记录媒体100的盘管理信息区域104(或盘管理信息区域105)中读出盘管理信息。(Step S201 ) Before data reproduction, the drive control unit 311 executes preparation processing for data reproduction. Such data reproduction preparation processing is executed when the information recording medium 100 is loaded on the drive device 310, for example. For example, the drive control unit 311 reads the disk management information from the disk management information area 104 (or the disk management information area 105 ) of the information recording medium 100 .

驱动控制部311为了确定表示分配给用户数据区域108的多个逻辑地址与多个物理地址的对应关系的初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,从该盘管理信息中取得用户数据区域开始位置信息1103、用户数据区域终端位置信息1104、和交替区域信息1105等。The drive control unit 311 obtains the user data area start position information 1103, User data area terminal position information 1104, alternate area information 1105, and the like.

之后,驱动控制部311根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,执行逻辑地址与初始物理地址的变换。Thereafter, the drive control unit 311 performs conversion between the logical address and the initial physical address based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

(步骤S202)首先,系统控制部301向驱动装置310发出再现指示,再现记录在信息记录媒体100的规定位置(例如LSN=256)上的AVDP。(Step S202) First, the system control unit 301 issues a reproduction instruction to the drive device 310 to reproduce the AVDP recorded at a predetermined position (for example, LSN=256) on the information recording medium 100 .

另外,AVDP是由UDF标准确定的、构成文件系统信息起点的数据构造,记录在卷构造区域410和卷构造区域411中。In addition, AVDP is a data structure defined by the UDF standard and constitutes the starting point of file system information, and is recorded in the volume structure area 410 and the volume structure area 411 .

(步骤S203)接着,系统控制部301从AVDP中取得记录在卷构造区域410中的主卷描述符串410A的位置信息。系统控制部301再向驱动装置310发出指示,再现主卷构造410A。(Step S203 ) Next, the system control unit 301 acquires the location information of the main volume descriptor string 410A recorded in the volume structure area 410 from the AVDP. The system control unit 301 then instructs the drive device 310 to reproduce the main volume structure 410A.

系统控制部301进一步从再现的主卷描述符串410A中,依次读出数据构造,取得FE(元数据文件)411的位置信息(LSN)。The system control unit 301 further sequentially reads the data structure from the reproduced main volume descriptor string 410A, and acquires the location information (LSN) of the FE (metadata file) 411 .

(步骤S204)接着,系统控制部301执行文件构造的再现。为了再现文件构造,系统控制部301根据取得的FE(元数据文件)441的位置信息(LSN),对驱动装置301执行再现指示,再现FE(元数据文件)411。(Step S204) Next, the system control unit 301 executes playback of the file structure. In order to reproduce the file structure, the system control unit 301 instructs the drive device 301 to reproduce the FE (metadata file) 411 based on the acquired location information (LSN) of the FE (metadata file) 441 .

这里,系统控制部301根据取得的FE(元数据文件)441的信息,获得元数据文件440的位置信息,并可访问元数据文件440。Here, the system control unit 301 obtains the location information of the metadata file 440 based on the acquired information of the FE (metadata file) 441 and can access the metadata file 440 .

(步骤S205)之后,利用通常的UDF标准的再现步骤,按FSD433、FE(根)442、FE(File-a)443、数据文件(File-a)460的顺序,执行再现(省略说明目录文件的再现)。(step S205) afterward, utilize the reproducing step of common UDF standard, by the order of FSD433, FE (root) 442, FE (File-a) 443, data file (File-a) 460, carry out reproduction (omit description catalog file reproduction).

在上述再现处理的各步骤中,从主机装置305向驱动装置310输出再现指示。驱动装置310的驱动控制部311从主机装置305接收再现指示,根据该再现指示执行再现处理。In each step of the playback process described above, a playback instruction is output from the host device 305 to the drive device 310 . The drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 receives a playback instruction from the host device 305, and executes playback processing according to the playback instruction.

再现指示包含表示应再现数据的位置的逻辑地址。逻辑地址例如由逻辑扇区序号(LSN)表示。或者,逻辑地址也可以由逻辑块地址(LBA)表示。再现指示例如是READ指令。The reproduction instruction includes a logical address indicating a location where data should be reproduced. The logical address is represented by, for example, a logical sector number (LSN). Alternatively, the logical address may also be represented by a Logical Block Address (LBA). The playback instruction is, for example, a READ command.

驱动控制部311根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射(例如参照图12),将包含于再现指示中的逻辑地址变换为物理地址。The drive control unit 311 converts the logical address included in the playback instruction into a physical address based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping (see, for example, FIG. 12 ).

其次,驱动控制部311通过检索交替管理信息列表1000,确定是否在交替管理信息列表1000中发现了交替管理信息1010,该交替管理信息1010具有与对应于再现指示中包含的逻辑地址之物理地址相同的交替源位置信息1012。Next, the drive control section 311 determines whether, by retrieving the alternation management information list 1000, the alternation management information 1010 having the same physical address as the logical address included in the reproduction instruction is found in the alternation management information list 1000. Alternative source location information 1012 for .

在发现的情况下,驱动控制部311参照该交替管理信息1010的交替目的地位置信息1013,控制记录再现部314,以从该交替目的地位置信息1013所示的位置起再现数据。If found, the drive control unit 311 refers to the replacement destination position information 1013 of the replacement management information 1010 , and controls the recording playback unit 314 to reproduce data from the position indicated by the replacement destination position information 1013 .

在未发现的情况下,驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以从对应于再现指示中包含的逻辑地址之物理地址所示的位置开始再现数据。将如此再现的数据返回到主机装置305。If not found, the drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 to start reproducing data from the position indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the reproduction instruction. The data thus reproduced is returned to the host device 305 .

1-6.记录处理步骤(2)1-6. Record processing steps (2)

图11表示交替管理信息1010B的数据构造。交替管理信息1010B表示图5B所示的交替管理信息1010的不同实施方式。FIG. 11 shows the data structure of the replacement management information 1010B. The replacement management information 1010B represents a different embodiment of the replacement management information 1010 shown in FIG. 5B .

在图11的交替管理信息1010B中,作为状态信息1011,包含如下3个信息。如图11所示,将该3个信息设为Flag1、Flag2、Flag3。The replacement management information 1010B in FIG. 11 includes the following three pieces of information as status information 1011 . As shown in FIG. 11 , these three pieces of information are Flag1, Flag2, and Flag3.

Flag1是交替管理信息1010B的分类用信息,包含表示该交替信息用于代替记录还是用于指示缺陷簇的信息。Flag1 is information for classification of the replacement management information 1010B, and includes information indicating whether the replacement information is used for replacement recording or indicates a defective cluster.

Flag2是涉及交替管理信息1010B管理的代替簇的记录位置的信息,并包含表示在交替区域中或无交替目的地、或在用户数据区域中的信息。Flag2 is information related to the recording position of the replacement cluster managed by the replacement management information 1010B, and includes information indicating whether it is in the replacement area or there is no replacement destination, or it is in the user data area.

Flag3是涉及交替管理信息1010B所管理的簇的数量的信息,包含表示该交替信息对应于单个簇或对应于连续的多个簇的信息。在对应于连续的多个簇的情况下,Flag3还包含表示是对应于连续区域的开始位置还是对应于结束位置的信息。Flag3 is information related to the number of clusters managed by the replacement management information 1010B, and includes information indicating that the replacement information corresponds to a single cluster or to a plurality of consecutive clusters. When corresponding to a plurality of continuous clusters, Flag3 further includes information indicating whether it corresponds to the start position or the end position of the continuous area.

下面,根据图11来说明本发明的详细记录步骤。Next, the detailed recording steps of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 11 .

下面,必要时使用图11右端列的记号来表示交替管理信息的种类。例如,具有第1行的Flag1=1(代替用)、Flag2=0(向交替区域的代替)、Flag3=00(单个簇)等状态信息1011的交替管理信息表述为交替管理信息(1)。Hereinafter, the types of the replacement management information will be indicated using symbols in the column at the right end of FIG. 11 as necessary. For example, replacement management information having status information 1011 such as Flag1=1 (for replacement), Flag2=0 (replacement to replacement area), and Flag3=00 (single cluster) in the first line is expressed as replacement management information (1).

图12是本发明的信息记录媒体100上的、物理地址空间与逻辑地址空间的数据构造的示例图。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the physical address space and the logical address space on the information recording medium 100 of the present invention.

另外,图12还示出从主机装置305观察时的表示在信息记录媒体100上的位置的逻辑地址,即逻辑扇区序号(LSN)、与表示在信息记录媒体100上的实际位置的物理地址,即物理扇区序号(PSN)在初始状态下的对应关系。将这种对应关系称为初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射(图中用虚线箭头示出。以下同样。)。In addition, FIG. 12 also shows the logical address representing the position on the information recording medium 100 when viewed from the host device 305, that is, the logical sector number (LSN), and the physical address representing the actual position on the information recording medium 100. , that is, the corresponding relationship of the physical sector number (PSN) in the initial state. This correspondence is referred to as an initial logical address-physical address mapping (indicated by dotted arrows in the figure. The same applies hereinafter).

图12所示的一个行对应于一个ECC簇。图12中,物理地址(PSN)与分配给该物理地址的逻辑地址(LSN)示于相同行中。One row shown in Fig. 12 corresponds to one ECC cluster. In FIG. 12, a physical address (PSN) and a logical address (LSN) assigned to the physical address are shown in the same row.

图12中,将PSN和LSN的值示为从对应的ECC簇的开头扇区至终端扇区的PSN和LSN的值。In FIG. 12 , the values of PSN and LSN are shown as the values of PSN and LSN from the head sector to the end sector of the corresponding ECC cluster.

这里,将1个ECC簇由32个扇区构成的情况作为例子,但也可以是其它构成。Here, a case where one ECC cluster is composed of 32 sectors is taken as an example, but other configurations are also possible.

PSN被分配给内周交替区域106、外周交替区域107和用户数据区域108。PSNs are assigned to the inner spare area 106 , the outer spare area 107 and the user data area 108 .

另外,设从用户数据区域108的开头分配轨道。在图12的状态下,由于完全未记录数据,所以LRA500指示用户数据区域108的开头。In addition, it is assumed that tracks are allocated from the beginning of the user data area 108 . In the state of FIG. 12 , since no data has been recorded at all, LRA 500 indicates the beginning of user data area 108 .

另一方面,LSN仅被分配给用户数据区域108(或卷空间109)。On the other hand, LSNs are allocated only to the user data area 108 (or volume space 109).

主机装置305使用该LSN,指定信息记录媒体100上的特定逻辑扇区,并进行记录或再现的指示。Using this LSN, the host device 305 designates a specific logical sector on the information recording medium 100 and instructs recording or reproduction.

驱动装置310根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将从主机装置305接收到的LSN变换为PSN,并根据得到的PSN,访问物理扇区或ECC簇。The drive device 310 converts the LSN received from the host device 305 into a PSN according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping, and accesses a physical sector or an ECC cluster according to the obtained PSN.

在下面说明的代替记录中,根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,在需要与该对应关系不同的逻辑地址-物理地址映射时,使用交替管理信息1010。In the replacement record described below, the replacement management information 1010 is used when a logical address-physical address mapping different from this correspondence relationship is required based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

图12中的PSN或LSN的值不过是用于说明的实例,实际的值因信息记录媒体100的构成或容量的不同而不同。The values of PSN and LSN in FIG. 12 are merely examples for explanation, and actual values vary depending on the configuration and capacity of the information recording medium 100 .

如上所述,盘管理信息或交替区域的容量可变,但这些容量在利用来自主机装置305的指示等执行的格式化处理时被确定。在格式化处理之后,用户数据区域108的开始和结束位置不变化。As described above, the disk management information and the capacity of the spare area are variable, but these capacities are determined at the time of formatting processing executed by an instruction from the host device 305 or the like. After the formatting process, the start and end positions of the user data area 108 do not change.

初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射可根据包含于盘管理信息中的盘构造信息1100的信息(具体而言为用户数据区域开始位置信息1103、用户数据区域终端位置信息1104、交替区域信息1105等)、利用规定的运算等唯一确定。The initial logical address-physical address mapping can be based on the information contained in the disc structure information 1100 in the disc management information (specifically, user data area start position information 1103, user data area end position information 1104, alternate area information 1105, etc.), It is uniquely determined by a predetermined calculation or the like.

参照图12~图17B,说明图11所示的交替管理信息1010B的使用实例。An example of use of the replacement management information 1010B shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 17B.

首先,说明从图12的状态向图13A的状态的变化。First, the transition from the state of FIG. 12 to the state of FIG. 13A will be described.

主机装置305指示在LSN=0的位置新记录数据“A”。The host device 305 instructs to newly record data "A" at the position of LSN=0.

接收到该记录指示的驱动装置310根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将LSN=0变换为PSN=1100,在PSN=1100的位置上记录数据“A”。Drive device 310 having received the recording instruction converts LSN=0 to PSN=1100 according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping, and records data "A" at the position of PSN=1100.

之后,驱动装置310检验记录的数据。这里设检验成功。After that, the drive device 310 checks the recorded data. Here it is assumed that the test is successful.

并且,主机装置305指示在LSN=0的位置上模拟重写记录数据“A1”。Furthermore, the host device 305 instructs to simulate overwriting the recording data "A1" at the position of LSN=0.

接收到该记录指示的驱动装置310根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将LSN=0变换为PSN=1100,在PSN=1100的位置上执行RMW处理。之后,在交替区域106中的PSN=100的位置上记录数据“A1”。Drive device 310 having received the recording instruction converts LSN=0 to PSN=1100 based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping, and executes RMW processing at the position of PSN=1100. After that, data "A1" is recorded at the position of PSN=100 in the spare area 106 .

此时,由驱动装置310生成交替管理信息511。对交替管理信息511的交替源设定作为数据“A”的记录位置的PSN=1100,对交替管理信息511的交替目的地设定作为数据“A1”的记录位置的PSN=100。根据图11来设定交替管理信息511的状态信息1011。At this time, the replacement management information 511 is generated by the drive device 310 . PSN=1100 is set as the recording position of data “A” for the replacement source of the replacement management information 511, and PSN=100 is set as the recording position of data “A1” for the replacement destination of the replacement management information 511 . The state information 1011 of the replacement management information 511 is set according to FIG. 11 .

交替管理信息511对应于图13A中的实线箭头。箭头的起点表示交替源,箭头的端部表示交替目的地(以下同样)。Alternation management information 511 corresponds to the solid-line arrows in FIG. 13A . The starting point of the arrow indicates an alternation source, and the end of the arrow indicates an alternation destination (the same applies hereinafter).

图13A中,主机装置305还指示在LSN=2的位置上记录数据“B”。In FIG. 13A, the host device 305 also instructs to record data "B" at the position of LSN=2.

若设在数据“B”的记录中检验失败,则将数据“B”记录在内周交替区域106内的PSN=132的位置上。If the verification fails during the recording of the data "B", the data "B" is recorded at the position of PSN=132 in the inner peripheral alternate area 106 .

对应于该交替记录,生成交替管理信息512。对交替管理信息512的交替源设定PSN=1032,对交替管理信息512的交替目的地设定PSN=132。交替管理信息512的状态信息1011也一样,根据图11来设定。Alternate management information 512 is generated corresponding to the alternate record. PSN=1032 is set for the replacement source of the replacement management information 512 , and PSN=132 is set for the replacement destination of the replacement management information 512 . The status information 1011 of the replacement management information 512 is similarly set according to FIG. 11 .

上述记录后的数据配置与交替管理信息列表如图13A和图13B所示。在图13B的交替管理信息列表1000A中使用了交替管理信息(1)。The above recorded data configuration and alternate management information list are shown in Fig. 13A and Fig. 13B. The replacement management information (1) is used in the replacement management information list 1000A of FIG. 13B.

另一方面,图14A和图14B是用于说明使用交替管理信息(4)、(7)时的状态的图。On the other hand, FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B are diagrams for explaining the state when the replacement management information (4), (7) is used.

这里,主机装置305指示在LSN=64的位置记录数据“C”。根据该记录指示,驱动装置310在PSN=1164的位置上记录数据“C”。这里,若设检验的结果为错误,则分配用户数据区域108内的未记录区域(PSN=1196),将数据“C”代替记录在PSN=1196的位置上。Here, the host device 305 instructs to record data "C" at the location of LSN=64. According to the recording instruction, the drive device 310 records data "C" at the position of PSN=1164. Here, if the result of the check is an error, an unrecorded area (PSN=1196) in the user data area 108 is allocated, and data "C" is recorded instead at the position of PSN=1196.

根据该结果,生成交替管理信息513。Based on this result, replacement management information 513 is generated.

并且,主机装置305指示在LSN=128的位置上记录数据“D”,之后,指示记录数据“D1”。Then, the host device 305 instructs to record data "D" at the position of LSN=128, and then instructs to record data "D1".

若设数据“D1”记录后的检验失败,则将数据“D1”代替记录在PSN=1292的位置上。If the verification after the data "D1" is recorded fails, the data "D1" is recorded instead at the position of PSN=1292.

此时,生成交替管理信息514。At this time, replacement management information 514 is generated.

另外,PSN=1260构成无代替目的地的缺陷簇,生成对应的交替管理信息515。Also, PSN=1260 constitutes a defective cluster with no replacement destination, and corresponding replacement management information 515 is generated.

并且,若设主机装置305在LSN=128的位置上指示了记录数据“D2”的模拟重写,则将数据“D2”代替记录在PSN=1324的位置上。Furthermore, assuming that the host device 305 instructs the analog overwriting of the recording data "D2" at the position of LSN=128, the data "D2" is recorded instead at the position of PSN=1324.

此时,生成交替管理信息514A。另一方面,由于不需要交替管理信息514,所以从交替管理信息列表1000中删除。At this time, replacement management information 514A is generated. On the other hand, since the replacement management information 514 is unnecessary, it is deleted from the replacement management information list 1000 .

以上记录处理之后,将LRA更新到500B的位置。After the above records are processed, the LRA is updated to the position of 500B.

另外,交替管理信息列表1000B(图14B)对状态信息1011中的Flag1执行重新排列,接着,对交替源位置信息1012的PSN值执行重新排列。In addition, the replacement management information list 1000B ( FIG. 14B ) performs rearrangement on Flag1 in the status information 1011 , and then performs rearrangement on the PSN values of the replacement source position information 1012 .

图15A和图15B是用于说明使用交替管理信息(5)、(6)时的状态图。15A and 15B are state diagrams for explaining the use of replacement management information (5), (6).

这里,主机装置305指示在LSN=256~X1的位置上记录数据“E”。Here, the host device 305 instructs to record data "E" at the position of LSN=256 to X1.

此时,若设检验失败,将数据“E”代替记录在PSN=x2~x3的位置,则生成交替管理信息516和交替管理信息517。各个交替管理信息表示相当于代替记录的开始位置的ECC簇的开头PSN和相当于结束位置的ECC簇的开头PSN。At this time, if the verification fails, the data "E" is recorded instead at the position of PSN=x2 to x3, and the replacement management information 516 and the replacement management information 517 are generated. Each piece of replacement management information indicates the head PSN of the ECC cluster corresponding to the start position of the alternative recording and the head PSN of the ECC cluster corresponding to the end position.

在图16A和图16B中,主机装置305还指示在LSN=257~X1的位置模拟重写记录数据“E1”。In FIGS. 16A and 16B , the host device 305 also instructs to simulate overwriting the recording data "E1" at the position of LSN=257 to X1.

此时,将数据“E1”记录在图15A中作为未记录区域的PSN=x4~x5的位置上。At this time, data "E1" is recorded at the position of PSN=x4 to x5 which is an unrecorded area in FIG. 15A.

之后,生成交替管理信息516A,作为表示该交替的开始点的信息,生成交替管理信息517A,作为表示代替记录的结束点的信息。Thereafter, replacement management information 516A is generated as information indicating the start point of the replacement, and replacement management information 517A is generated as information indicating the end point of the alternative recording.

此刻,由于不需要交替管理信息516、517,所以从交替管理信息列表中删除。At this time, since the replacement management information 516, 517 is unnecessary, it is deleted from the replacement management information list.

图15A和16A中,设代替记录目的地全部在用户数据区域108内,但当然也可以在交替区域106内。此时,使用交替管理信息(2)、(3)。In FIGS. 15A and 16A, it is assumed that all alternative recording destinations are within the user data area 108, but they may be within the spare area 106, of course. At this time, the replacement management information (2), (3) is used.

如参照图8A所说明的那样,将更新后的交替管理信息列表记录在盘管理信息区域中。As described with reference to FIG. 8A, the updated replacement management information list is recorded in the disc management information area.

1-7.再现处理步骤(2)1-7. Reproduction processing procedure (2)

当再现按上述方式记录的数据时,执行如下处理。When reproducing data recorded in the above-described manner, the following processing is performed.

在数据再现之前,驱动控制部311执行数据再现的准备处理。这种数据再现的准备处理例如与上述步骤S201一样。Before data reproduction, the drive control unit 311 executes preparation processing for data reproduction. The preparatory process for such data reproduction is, for example, the same as the above-mentioned step S201.

另外,例如在图13A的状态下,若从主机装置305执行LSN=32的数据“B”的再现指示,则驱动装置310根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,得到PSN=1132。Also, for example, in the state of FIG. 13A , if host device 305 executes an instruction to play back data "B" with LSN=32, drive device 310 obtains PSN=1132 based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

驱动装置310从最新的交替管理信息列表1000中,检索出具有PSN=1132的交替管理信息,作为交替源。The drive device 310 retrieves the replacement management information with PSN=1132 from the latest replacement management information list 1000 as the replacement source.

这里,由于发现交替管理信息512,所以从中取得交替目的地的PSN=132。Here, since the replacement management information 512 is found, PSN=132 of the replacement destination is acquired therefrom.

驱动装置310根据PSN=132,再现数据“B”,并作为LSN=32的再现数据返回到主机装置305。The drive device 310 reproduces the data "B" according to PSN=132, and returns it to the host device 305 as reproduced data of LSN=32.

即便主机装置305指定的LSN发生了变化,驱动装置310侧的处理也相同。根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将接收到的LSN变换为PSN,若发现对应的交替管理信息,则根据代替簇,再现数据。若未发现对应的交替管理信息,则根据PSN原样执行再现即可。Even if the LSN specified by the host device 305 changes, the processing on the drive device 310 side is the same. According to the initial logical address-physical address mapping, the received LSN is converted into PSN, and if the corresponding replacement management information is found, the data is reproduced according to the replacement cluster. If no corresponding replacement management information is found, it is only necessary to perform playback according to the PSN as it is.

如上所述,在信息记录媒体100的模拟重写记录中,可不浪费地将用户数据区域用作交替目的地。As described above, in the pseudo-overwrite recording of the information recording medium 100, the user data area can be used as an alternate destination without waste.

1-8.记录处理步骤(3)1-8. Record processing steps (3)

图18表示与上述交替管理信息1010或交替管理信息1010B同样的交替管理信息的不同构成例,即DFL条目2010。FIG. 18 shows a DFL entry 2010 , which is a different configuration example of the replacement management information similar to the replacement management information 1010 or the replacement management information 1010B described above.

包含于DFL条目2010中的状态1 2011A和状态2 2011B、缺陷簇开头PSN 2012、代替簇开头PSN2013分别与上述状态信息1011、交替源位置信息1012、交替源位置信息1013相同。The state 1 2011A and state 2 2011B, defective cluster head PSN 2012, and replacement cluster head PSN 2013 included in the DFL entry 2010 are the same as the above-mentioned state information 1011, replacement source location information 1012, and replacement source location information 1013, respectively.

这里,与参照图5B所说明的一样,缺陷簇开头PSN 2012与代替簇开头PSN 2013也可以使用对应的ECC簇的开头扇区的物理地址(例如PSN)进行表示。这是因为在缺陷管理和模拟重写记录中,按ECC簇单位来执行映射。Here, as described with reference to FIG. 5B , the defective cluster head PSN 2012 and the replacement cluster head PSN 2013 may also be represented by the physical address (for example, PSN) of the head sector of the corresponding ECC cluster. This is because mapping is performed in units of ECC clusters in defect management and pseudo-overwrite recording.

这里,状态1 2011A至少包含与交替管理信息1010B中的Flag1和Flag2相同的信息。即,例如在状态12011A的值为“1000”的情况下,该交替信息表示无交替目的地(相当于Flag2=0,无交替目的地的情况)。此时,对代替簇开头PSN2013设定“0”。Here, the state 1 2011A includes at least the same information as Flag1 and Flag2 in the replacement management information 1010B. That is, for example, when the value of the status 12011A is "1000", the replacement information indicates that there is no replacement destination (corresponding to the case where Flag2=0 and no replacement destination). At this time, "0" is set in the substitute cluster head PSN 2013 .

另一方面,在存在交替目的地的情况下,对状态1设定“0000”(相当于Flag2=0,有交替目的地的情况)。On the other hand, when there is an alternate destination, "0000" is set in Status 1 (corresponding to Flag2 = 0, when there is an alternate destination).

状态22011B至少包含与交替管理信息1010B中的Flag3一样的信息。Status 22011B includes at least the same information as Flag3 in replacement management information 1010B.

即,例如在状态2 2011B的值为“0000”的情况下,该交替信息对应于单个簇(相当于Flag3=00)。That is, for example, when the value of the state 2 2011B is "0000", this alternate information corresponds to a single cluster (equivalent to Flag3=00).

同样,在状态2的值例如为“0001”的情况下,该交替信息对应于包含多个簇的连续区域的开始簇之开头扇区的位置(相当于Flag3=01)。另一方面,在为“0010”的情况下,对应于包含多个簇的连续区域的终端簇之开头扇区的位置(相当于Flag3=10)。Similarly, when the value of Status 2 is, for example, "0001", this alternate information corresponds to the position of the head sector of the head cluster of a continuous area including a plurality of clusters (equivalent to Flag3=01). On the other hand, in the case of "0010", it corresponds to the position of the head sector of the end cluster of the continuous area including a plurality of clusters (corresponding to Flag3=10).

该DFL条目2010可适用于全部实施方式。This DFL entry 2010 is applicable to all embodiments.

下面,参照图18所示的DFL条目2010的数据构造与图19A的流程图,进一步详细说明使用上述图8A说明的步骤S113中的对交替管理信息的处理例。Next, referring to the data structure of the DFL entry 2010 shown in FIG. 18 and the flowchart of FIG. 19A, an example of the processing of the replacement management information in step S113 described above using FIG. 8A will be described in more detail.

这里,假设在图8A的步骤S112中执行向用于模拟重写记录的交替目的地进行记录,并前进到步骤S113的情况。Here, assume a case where recording to an alternate destination for pseudo-overwrite recording is performed in step S112 of FIG. 8A , and the process proceeds to step S113 .

(步骤S301)首先,判断该模拟重写记录是第1次重写记录、还是第2次或之后的重写记录。(Step S301 ) First, it is determined whether the simulated overwrite record is the first overwrite record or the second or subsequent overwrite record.

可通过对例如最新的交替管理信息列表,检索DFL条目2010来进行,该DFL条目2010具有图8A的步骤S103中得到的、包含对应于记录指示中包含的逻辑地址之物理地址的ECC簇的开头PSN值,作为缺陷簇开头PSN2012的值。It can be performed by searching, for example, the latest replacement management information list for the DFL entry 2010 having the head of the ECC cluster including the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction obtained in step S103 of FIG. 8A The PSN value is used as the value of PSN2012 at the beginning of the defect cluster.

该最新的交替管理信息列表例如在步骤S101(图8A)中从盘管理信息区域再现,并保持在存储器电路312中。This latest alternate management information list is reproduced from the disc management information area in step S101 ( FIG. 8A ), for example, and held in the memory circuit 312 .

在交替管理信息列表中未发现该交替管理信息(例如DFL条目2010)的情况下,作为第1次模拟重写记录,处理前进到步骤S302。When the replacement management information (for example, the DFL entry 2010) is not found in the replacement management information list, the process proceeds to step S302 as the first pseudo-overwrite recording.

在交替管理信息列表中发现了该交替管理信息的情况下,作为是第2次模拟重写记录,处理前进到步骤S304。If the replacement management information is found in the replacement management information list, it is regarded as the second pseudo-overwrite recording, and the process proceeds to step S304.

另外,模拟重写记录是第1次重写记录、还是第2次或之后的重写记录的判断也可以在其它步骤中事先执行。例如,也可以在步骤S106中执行。也可以保持此时的判断结果,在步骤S301中使用。In addition, the determination of whether the simulated overwrite record is the first overwrite record or the second or subsequent overwrite record may be performed in advance in other steps. For example, it may also be performed in step S106. The judgment result at this time may also be kept and used in step S301.

(步骤S302)在第1次交替记录的情况下,执行如下处理。(Step S302) In the case of the first alternate recording, the following processing is performed.

首先,由驱动控制部311在驱动装置310的存储器电路312上生成新的DFL条目2010。First, a new DFL entry 2010 is created on the memory circuit 312 of the drive device 310 by the drive control unit 311 .

(步骤S303)接着,对该DFL条目2010设定值。(Step S303 ) Next, a value is set for the DFL entry 2010 .

即,对状态1 2011A设定适当的值。例如,若是存在交替目的地的交替记录,则设定“0000”。That is, set an appropriate value for the state 1 2011A. For example, "0000" is set if there is an alternate record of the alternate destination.

之后,对缺陷簇开头PSN2012,设定位于对应于记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址上的ECC簇的开头PSN的值。Thereafter, for the defective cluster head PSN 2012, the value of the head PSN of the ECC cluster located at the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction is set.

接着,对代替簇开头PSN2013设定在之前的交替记录中、实际记录了数据的代替簇的开头PSN的值。Next, the value of the head PSN of the alternate cluster in which data was actually recorded in the previous alternate recording is set in the alternate cluster head PSN 2013 .

并且,对该DFL条目2010的状态2 2011B设定适当的值。例如,若是单个簇的交替记录,则设定“0000”。And, an appropriate value is set for the state 2 2011B of the DFL entry 2010. For example, in the case of alternate recording of a single cluster, "0000" is set.

(步骤S304)在第2次之后的交替记录的情况下,执行如下处理。(Step S304) In the case of alternate recording after the second time, the following processing is performed.

即,为了执行对之前步骤中发现的DFL条目2010的更新处理,而前进到步骤S305。That is, in order to perform update processing on the DFL entry 2010 found in the previous step, the process proceeds to step S305.

(步骤S305)首先,将该DFL条目2010的状态1 2011A更新为适当的值。例如,若是存在交替目的地的交替记录,则设定“0000”。(Step S305) First, update the state 1 2011A of the DFL entry 2010 to an appropriate value. For example, "0000" is set if there is an alternate record of the alternate destination.

之后,将代替簇开头PSN2013更新为:在之前的交替记录中、实际记录了数据的代替簇的开头PSN的值。即,设定新的交替目的地。Thereafter, the replacement cluster head PSN 2013 is updated to the value of the head PSN of the replacement cluster in which data was actually recorded in the previous alternate recording. That is, a new replacement destination is set.

就缺陷簇开头PSN2012而言,由于是对相同ECC簇的第2次之后的交替记录,所以不需变更,只要保持相同值即可。As for the defective cluster head PSN2012, since it is the second and subsequent alternate recordings to the same ECC cluster, there is no need to change it, and it only needs to keep the same value.

并且,将该DFL条目2010的状态2 2011B更新为适当的值。例如,若是单个簇的交替记录,则设定“0000”。And, update the state 2 2011B of the DFL entry 2010 to the appropriate value. For example, in the case of alternate recording of a single cluster, "0000" is set.

(步骤S306)通过以上处理,执行交替管理信息列表的更新。即,追加新的DFL条目2010或更新现有的DFL条目2010的值。(Step S306) Through the above processing, the replacement management information list is updated. That is, a new DFL entry 2010 is added or the value of an existing DFL entry 2010 is updated.

执行交替管理信息列表的重新排列。该重新排列例如对状态12011A执行重新排列。并且,按缺陷簇开头PSN 2012、状态2 2011B、代替簇开头PSN 2013的顺序执行重新排列。Perform rearrangement of the alternate management information list. This rearrangement is performed on state 12011A, for example. And, perform rearrangement in the order of defect cluster head PSN 2012, state 2 2011B, replacement cluster head PSN 2013.

如上所述,图8A的步骤S113为结束。将这里得到的、最新的交替管理信息列表补写到(暂时)盘管理信息区域中。As mentioned above, step S113 in FIG. 8A is the end. The latest alternate management information list obtained here is overwritten in the (temporary) disc management information area.

上述处理例中,说明执行了用于模拟重写记录的交替记录的情况,但这同样可适用于基于缺陷簇发生的交替记录。In the above processing example, a case was described in which alternate recording for pseudo-overwrite recording was performed, but the same applies to alternate recording based on occurrence of defective clusters.

但是,如背景技术中参照图33A和图33B所说明的那样,在现有的一次写型光盘的缺陷管理中,每当产生交替记录时,都残留现有的交替管理信息,并追加新的交替管理信息。However, as explained with reference to FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B in the background art, in the defect management of the conventional write-once optical disk, whenever alternate recording occurs, the existing alternate management information remains and a new one is added. Alternate management information.

若将这种方法适用于本实施方式所示的那样将用户数据区域用作交替目的地的记录方法,则每当产生交替记录时,交替管理信息都增加,交替管理信息列表的容量变大,所以在驱动装置等的安装上不理想。If this method is applied to the recording method using the user data area as an alternate destination as described in this embodiment, the alternate management information will increase every time alternate recording occurs, and the capacity of the alternate management information list will increase. Therefore, it is not ideal for installation of a driving device or the like.

尤其是就现有的一次写型光盘的缺陷管理而言,未再次交替被暂时交替的簇,但在如本实施方式所示的那样执行模拟重写记录的情况下,可多次成为交替记录的对象。因此,有可能交替管理信息列表的容量变得非常大。In particular, in the defect management of conventional write-once optical discs, clusters that were once alternated are not alternated again, but when pseudo-overwrite recording is performed as shown in this embodiment, alternate recording can be performed multiple times. Object. Therefore, there is a possibility that the capacity of the alternate management information list becomes very large.

另外,在交替管理信息列表中存在多个具有相同缺陷簇开头PSN2012的值的交替管理信息,为了得到最新的交替管理信息,还需要追加处理或构成。In addition, a plurality of replacement management information having the same defective cluster head PSN2012 value exists in the replacement management information list, and additional processing or configuration is required to obtain the latest replacement management information.

就改写型光盘的缺陷管理而言,对于全部的交替目的地簇,无论是否已用作交替目的地,均设置了交替管理信息。In defect management of a rewritable optical disc, replacement management information is set for all replacement destination clusters regardless of whether they have been used as replacement destinations or not.

若将这种方法适用于本实施方式所示的将用户数据区域用作交替目的地的方法,则最初需要非常大量的交替管理信息,安装上仍不理想。If this method is applied to the method of using the user data area as the replacement destination described in this embodiment, a very large amount of replacement management information is required initially, which is still not ideal in terms of implementation.

另一方面,根据使用图19A的方法,只要仅生成并管理必要的最低限度的缺陷管理信息即可,也可以容易地发现最新的交替管理信息。On the other hand, according to the method using FIG. 19A , it is only necessary to generate and manage the minimum necessary defect management information, and it is also possible to easily find the latest replacement management information.

1-9.记录处理步骤(4)1-9. Record processing steps (4)

参照图19B来进一步详细说明数据记录步骤中的交替管理信息的处理例。An example of the processing of the replacement management information in the data recording step will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 19B .

图19B所示的各步骤包含于图8A所示的步骤S113中。在下面的说明中,参照图18所示的交替管理信息的一例,即DFL条目2010的数据构造。Each step shown in FIG. 19B is included in step S113 shown in FIG. 8A . In the following description, reference is made to the data structure of the DFL entry 2010 as an example of the replacement management information shown in FIG. 18 .

这里,假设在图8A的步骤S112中执行对用于模拟重写记录的交替目的地的记录,并前进到步骤S113的情况。Here, assume a case where recording to an alternate destination for pseudo-overwrite recording is performed in step S112 of FIG. 8A , and proceeds to step S113 .

(步骤S601)驱动控制部311确定由记录指示所指定的区域在物理地址空间中是否是连续区域。(Step S601) The drive control unit 311 determines whether the area specified by the recording instruction is a continuous area in the physical address space.

例如,驱动控制部311根据记录指示所指定的记录位置与记录指示所指定的应记录的数据容量,确定物理地址空间上的区域的尺寸。在如此确定的物理地址空间上的区域的尺寸比一个ECC簇的尺寸大的情况下,驱动控制部311确定为记录指示所指定的区域在物理地址空间中是连续区域。For example, the drive control unit 311 determines the size of the area on the physical address space based on the recording position designated by the recording instruction and the data volume to be recorded designated by the recording instruction. When the size of the area on the physical address space determined in this way is larger than the size of one ECC cluster, the drive control unit 311 determines that the area designated by the recording instruction is a continuous area in the physical address space.

在步骤S601的判定结果是‘是’的情况下,处理前进到步骤S602。在步骤S601的判定结果是‘否’的情况下,处理前进到步骤S603。When the determination result in step S601 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S602. When the determination result in step S601 is "No", the process proceeds to step S603.

(步骤S602)驱动控制部311确定步骤S112中实际记录了数据的区域在物理地址空间中是否是连续区域。(Step S602) The drive control section 311 determines whether the area in which data is actually recorded in step S112 is a continuous area in the physical address space.

例如,当步骤S112中实施了记录处理的区域的尺寸等于由记录指示所指定区域的尺寸时,驱动控制部311确定为步骤S112中实际记录了数据的区域在物理地址空间中是连续区域。For example, when the size of the area subjected to the recording process in step S112 is equal to the size of the area designated by the recording instruction, the drive control unit 311 determines that the area in which data is actually recorded in step S112 is a continuous area in the physical address space.

在步骤S602的判定结果是‘是’的情况下,处理前进到步骤S604。在步骤S602的判定结果是‘否’的情况下,处理前进到步骤S603。In a case where the determination result in step S602 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S604. In a case where the determination result in step S602 is "No", the process proceeds to step S603.

(步骤S603)驱动控制部311执行例如参照图19A说明的处理。(Step S603 ) The drive control unit 311 executes, for example, the processing described with reference to FIG. 19A .

(步骤S604)驱动控制部311确定模拟重写记录是第1次重写记录、还是第2次或之后的重写记录。(Step S604) The drive control unit 311 determines whether the pseudo-overwrite recording is the first overwrite recording or the second or subsequent overwrite recording.

例如,通过检查最新的交替管理信息列表,根据是否在交替管理信息列表中发现了第1DFL条目2010(状态2 2011B=“0001”)与第2DFL条目2010(状态2 2011B=“0010”)进行上述确定,其中该第1DFL条目2010具有表示与步骤S601中确定的连续区域相同的区域的交替源位置信息。For example, by checking the latest replacement management information list, the above is performed according to whether the first DFL entry 2010 (state 2 2011B="0001") and the second DFL entry 2010 (state 2 2011B="0010") are found in the replacement management information list It is determined that the first DFL entry 2010 has the alternate source position information indicating the same area as the continuous area determined in step S601.

在交替管理信息列表中未发现该第1DFL条目2010与第2DFL条目2010的情况下,作为第1次模拟重写记录,处理前进到步骤S605。When the first DFL entry 2010 and the second DFL entry 2010 are not found in the replacement management information list, the processing proceeds to step S605 as the first pseudo-overwrite recording.

在交替管理信息列表中发现了该第1DFL条目2010与第2DFL条目2010的情况下,作为第2次模拟重写记录,处理前进到步骤S607。When the first DFL entry 2010 and the second DFL entry 2010 are found in the replacement management information list, the processing proceeds to step S607 as the second pseudo-overwrite recording.

(步骤S605)驱动控制部311生成新的第1DFL条目2010与新的第2DFL条目2010,并将它们存储在存储器电路312中。(Step S605 ) The drive control unit 311 generates a new first DFL entry 2010 and a new second DFL entry 2010 , and stores them in the memory circuit 312 .

(步骤S606)驱动控制部311对第1和第2DFL条目2010设定值。(Step S606 ) The drive control unit 311 sets values in the first and second DFL entries 2010 .

对第1DFL条目2010的状态1 2011A设定表示是存在交替目的地的交替记录的“0000”。In the state 1 2011A of the first DFL entry 2010, "0000" indicating that there is an alternate record of the alternate destination is set.

对第1DFL条目2010的缺陷簇开头PSN2012设定包含由记录指示所指定的区域的开始位置之ECC簇的开头PSN的值。In the defective cluster head PSN 2012 of the first DFL entry 2010, the value of the head PSN of the ECC cluster including the start position of the area specified by the recording instruction is set.

对第1DFL条目2010的交替簇开头PSN2013,设定包含实际记录了数据的连续区域的开始位置之ECC簇的开头PSN的值。In the alternate cluster head PSN 2013 of the first DFL entry 2010, the value of the head PSN of the ECC cluster including the start position of the continuous area in which data is actually recorded is set.

对第1DFL条目2010的状态2 2011B设定表示是连续区域的开始位置的“0001”。In the state 2 2011B of the first DFL entry 2010, "0001" indicating the start position of the continuous area is set.

对第2DFL条目2010的状态1 2011A设定表示是存在交替目的地的交替记录的“0000”。In the state 1 2011A of the second DFL entry 2010, "0000" indicating that there is an alternate record of the alternate destination is set.

对第2DFL条目2010的缺陷簇开头PSN2012设定包含由记录指示所指定的区域的终端位置之ECC簇的开头PSN的值。例如,根据对应于记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址与应记录的数据的数据长度,求出由记录指示指定的区域的终端位置。In the defective cluster head PSN 2012 of the second DFL entry 2010, the value of the head PSN of the ECC cluster including the end position of the area specified by the recording instruction is set. For example, the end position of the area designated by the recording instruction is obtained from the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction and the data length of the data to be recorded.

对第2DFL条目2010的交替簇开头PSN2013,设定包含实际记录了数据的连续区域的终端位置之ECC簇的开头PSN的值。In the alternate cluster head PSN 2013 of the second DFL entry 2010, the value of the head PSN of the ECC cluster including the end position of the continuous area in which data is actually recorded is set.

对第2DFL条目2010的状态2 2011B设定表示是连续区域的终端位置的“0010”。In the state 2 2011B of the second DFL entry 2010, "0010" indicating the end position of the continuous area is set.

(步骤S607)驱动控制部311对步骤S604中发现的第1和第2DFL条目2010执行更新处理。具体而言,该更新处理通过在步骤608中对第1和第2DFL条目2010设定值来执行。(Step S607) The drive control unit 311 performs update processing on the first and second DFL entries 2010 found in step S604. Specifically, this update process is executed by setting values in the first and second DFL entries 2010 in step 608 .

(步骤S608)驱动控制部311对第1和第2DFL条目2010设定值。(Step S608 ) The drive control unit 311 sets values in the first and second DFL entries 2010 .

对第1DFL条目2010的交替簇开头PSN2013设定包含实际记录了数据的连续区域的开始位置之ECC簇的开头PSN的值。即,设定新的交替目的地区域的开始位置。In the alternate cluster head PSN 2013 of the first DFL entry 2010, the value of the head PSN of the ECC cluster including the start position of the continuous area in which data is actually recorded is set. That is, the start position of a new replacement destination area is set.

就第1DFL条目2010的缺陷簇开头PSN2012而言,不必变更,只要保持相同值即可。这是因为,是对相同ECC簇的第2次之后的交替记录的缘故。The defective cluster head PSN 2012 of the first DFL entry 2010 does not need to be changed, and only needs to keep the same value. This is because it is the second and subsequent alternate recordings to the same ECC cluster.

对第2DFL条目2010的交替簇开头PSN2013设定包含实际记录了数据的连续区域的终端位置之ECC簇的开头PSN的值。即,设定新的交替目的地区域的结束位置。In the alternate cluster head PSN 2013 of the second DFL entry 2010, the value of the head PSN of the ECC cluster including the end position of the continuous area in which data is actually recorded is set. That is, the end position of a new replacement destination area is set.

就第2DFL条目2010的缺陷簇开头PSN2012而言,不必变更,只要保持相同值即可。这是因为,是对相同ECC簇的第2次之后的交替记录的缘故。The defective cluster head PSN 2012 of the 2nd DFL entry 2010 does not need to be changed, and only needs to keep the same value. This is because it is the second and subsequent alternate recordings to the same ECC cluster.

(步骤S609)通过上述处理,执行交替管理信息列表的更新。即,将新的第1和第2DFL条目2010追加到交替管理信息列表中。或者,更新交替管理信息列表内的现有的第1和第2DFL条目2010的值。(Step S609) Through the above processing, the update of the replacement management information list is executed. That is, new first and second DFL entries 2010 are added to the replacement management information list. Alternatively, the values of the existing first and second DFL entries 2010 in the replacement management information list are updated.

执行交替管理信息列表的重新排列。该重新排列例如按更新管理信息的状态1 2011A的顺序来执行。并且,重新排列按缺陷簇开头PSN 2012、状态2 2011B、交替簇开头PSN 2013的顺序执行。Perform rearrangement of the alternate management information list. This rearrangement is performed, for example, in the order of updating the status 1 2011A of the management information. And, the rearrangement is performed in the order of defect cluster head PSN 2012, state 2 2011B, alternate cluster head PSN 2013.

如上所述,图8A的步骤S113是结束。将这里得到的、最新的交替管理信息列表补写到(暂时)盘管理信息区域中。As described above, step S113 of FIG. 8A is the end. The latest alternate management information list obtained here is overwritten in the (temporary) disc management information area.

另外,上述处理例中,说明执行了用于模拟重写记录的交替记录的情形,但这也可以同样适用于基于缺陷簇的发生而进行的交替记录。In addition, in the above processing example, a case where alternate recording for pseudo-overwrite recording is performed is described, but this can also be applied similarly to alternate recording based on occurrence of a defective cluster.

用图20A~图24B来进一步说明记录处理步骤。The recording processing procedure will be further described with reference to FIGS. 20A to 24B.

图20A与图13A等一样,表示信息记录媒体100上的物理地址空间与逻辑地址空间。图20A中,示出在格式化处理之后,在LSN=0的位置上记录了数据“A0”的状态。在物理地址空间中,在PSN=1000的位置上记录了数据“A0”。FIG. 20A shows the physical address space and logical address space on the information recording medium 100, similarly to FIG. 13A and the like. In FIG. 20A, there is shown a state where data "A0" is recorded at the position of LSN=0 after the formatting process. In the physical address space, data "A0" is recorded at the position of PSN=1000.

此时,LSN=0与PSN=1000维持了初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射的关系。At this time, LSN=0 and PSN=1000 maintain the initial logical address-physical address mapping relationship.

因此,图20B所示的、对应于图20A的交替管理信息列表不包含交替管理信息,仅包含标题信息1001。Therefore, the replacement management information list shown in FIG. 20B corresponding to FIG. 20A does not include replacement management information, but includes only header information 1001 .

下面,设在图20A的状态下,从主机装置305指示在LSN=0的位置记录数据“A1”。图21A示出执行了该记录之后的状态。Next, assume that in the state of FIG. 20A, the host device 305 instructs to record data "A1" at the position of LSN=0. FIG. 21A shows the state after this recording is performed.

如图21A所示,由于PSN=1000的位置已记录完成,所以数据“A1”例如被交替到用户数据区域中的PSN=1132的位置。As shown in FIG. 21A, since the position of PSN=1000 has already been recorded, the data "A1" is alternated to the position of PSN=1132 in the user data area, for example.

由于此时的交替记录是第1次交替记录,所以根据用图19A说明的步骤S302之后的步骤,将图21B所示的DFL条目2100A追加到交替管理信息列表中。Since the alternate recording at this time is the first alternate recording, the DFL entry 2100A shown in FIG. 21B is added to the alternate management information list according to steps after step S302 described with reference to FIG. 19A .

之后,设在图21A的状态下,从主机装置305指示在LSN=0的位置记录数据“A2”。图22A示出执行了该记录之后的状态。Thereafter, in the state of FIG. 21A , the host device 305 instructs to record data "A2" at the position of LSN=0. FIG. 22A shows the state after this recording is performed.

如图22A所示,由于PSN=1000已记录完成,所以数据“A2”例如被交替到用户数据区域中的PSN=1164的位置。As shown in FIG. 22A, since PSN=1000 has already been recorded, data "A2" is alternated to, for example, the position of PSN=1164 in the user data area.

由于此时的交替记录是第2次交替记录,所以根据用图19A说明的步骤S304之后的步骤,如图22B所示,更新DFL条目2100A,形成DFL条目2100B。(即不追加DFL条目。)Since the alternate recording at this time is the second alternate recording, the DFL entry 2100A is updated to form the DFL entry 2100B as shown in FIG. 22B according to steps after step S304 described with reference to FIG. 19A . (i.e. no DFL entries are appended.)

接着,设在图22A的状态,从主机装置305指示在LSN=96的位置记录数据“B0”,在LSN=128-192的位置记录数据“C0”。图23A示出执行了该记录之后的状态。Next, assuming the state of FIG. 22A, the host device 305 instructs to record data "B0" at the location of LSN=96, and to record data "C0" at the location of LSN=128-192. FIG. 23A shows the state after this recording is performed.

如图23A所示,设当将数据“B0”记录在PSN=1196的位置上时,检验处理为错误。As shown in FIG. 23A, it is assumed that when the data "B0" is recorded at the position of PSN=1196, the verification process is an error.

此时,将数据“B0”例如交替到外周交替区域107中的PSN=x10。At this time, the data "B0" is alternated to PSN=x10 in the outer peripheral alternate area 107, for example.

由于此时的交替记录是第1次交替记录,所以根据用图19A说明的步骤S302之后的步骤,如图23B所示,追加DFL条目2101A。Since the alternate recording at this time is the first alternate recording, the DFL entry 2101A is added as shown in FIG. 23B according to steps after step S302 described with reference to FIG. 19A .

另一方面,若设数据“C0”记录之后的检验成功,则交替管理信息列表不变化。On the other hand, if the verification after the data "C0" is recorded succeeds, the replacement management information list does not change.

下面,设在图23A的状态下,从主机装置305指示在LSN=128-192的位置记录数据“C1”。图24A示出执行了该记录之后的状态。Next, assume that in the state of FIG. 23A, the host device 305 instructs to record data "C1" at the location of LSN=128-192. FIG. 24A shows the state after this recording is performed.

如图24A所示,由于PSN=1228-1292的位置已记录完成,所以将数据“C1”交替到例如用户数据区域中的PSN=1324-1388的位置上。As shown in FIG. 24A, since the positions of PSN=1228-1292 have already been recorded, the data "C1" is alternated to, for example, the positions of PSN=1324-1388 in the user data area.

由于此时的交替记录是第1次交替记录,所以根据用图19A说明的步骤S302之后的步骤,如图24B所示,追加DFL条目2102A和2103A。Since the alternate recording at this time is the first alternate recording, DFL entries 2102A and 2103A are added as shown in FIG. 24B according to steps after step S302 described with reference to FIG. 19A .

这里,由于该交替记录是从连续区域2200(PSN=1228-1292)至连续区域2201(PSN=1324-1388)的交替记录,所以如上所述,使用表示交替区域的开头的DFL条目2102A、和表示结束位置的DFL条目2103A。Here, since this alternate recording is an alternate recording from the continuous area 2200 (PSN=1228-1292) to the consecutive area 2201 (PSN=1324-1388), as described above, the DFL entry 2102A indicating the beginning of the alternate area, and DFL entry 2103A representing the end location.

即,本发明的驱动装置310在将连续区域2200交替到用户数据区域108中的连续区域2201的模拟重写中,生成将连续区域2200的开始位置映射到连续区域2201的开始位置的第1交替管理信息(DFL条目2102A)、以及将连续区域2200的结束位置映射到连续区域2201的结束位置的第2交替管理信息(DFL条目2103A)。That is, the drive device 310 of the present invention generates a first alternate region in which the start position of the continuous area 2200 is mapped to the start position of the continuous area 2201 in the simulated overwrite of alternating the continuous area 2200 with the continuous area 2201 in the user data area 108. management information (DFL entry 2102A), and second replacement management information (DFL entry 2103A) for mapping the end position of the contiguous area 2200 to the end position of the contiguous area 2201 .

这里,尽管执行了3个ECC簇大小的连续区域的交替记录,但仅追加两个DFL条目。这是通过利用DFL条目2102A和DFL条目2103A映射用户区域中的交替目的地并作为连续区域所得到的效果。Here, only two DFL entries are appended although alternate recording of consecutive areas of the size of 3 ECC clusters is performed. This is an effect obtained by mapping alternate destinations in the user area as continuous areas using the DFL entry 2102A and the DFL entry 2103A.

就连续区域的交替而言,当然也可以在第2次之后更新现有的DFL条目。As for the alternation of consecutive areas, it is of course also possible to update existing DFL entries after the second time.

(实施方式2)(Embodiment 2)

2-1.NWA确定处理步骤2-1.NWA determination processing steps

这里,说明由驱动装置310响应主机装置305的请求而返回的逻辑地址所表示的下次可记录位置(下面记作逻辑NWA)的确定方法。Here, a method for specifying the next recordable position (hereinafter referred to as logical NWA) indicated by the logical address returned by the drive device 310 in response to the request from the host device 305 will be described.

在本实施方式中,通过如下步骤来确定逻辑NWA。In this embodiment, the logical NWA is determined through the following steps.

首先,确定包含由LRA所示的物理扇区的ECC簇的下一ECC簇。该ECC簇是下一记录ECC簇。记录ECC簇的开头物理扇区为下次可记录位置,由该物理地址表示的下次可记录位置是上述NWA。First, the ECC cluster next to the ECC cluster containing the physical sector indicated by LRA is determined. This ECC cluster is the next recording ECC cluster. The head physical sector where the ECC cluster is recorded is the next recordable position, and the next recordable position indicated by this physical address is the above-mentioned NWA.

逻辑NWA的值是根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将该NWA表示的PSN的值变换为LSN后所得到的值。The value of the logical NWA is a value obtained by converting the value of the PSN represented by the NWA into an LSN according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

下面,用几个具体例进行说明。Hereinafter, several specific examples are used for description.

在图12的状态下,由于LRA500指示用户数据区域108的开头,所以此刻物理地址空间中的NWA是PSN=1100。由于对PSN=1100的LSN是LSN=0,所以逻辑NWA=0。In the state of FIG. 12 , since LRA 500 indicates the head of user data area 108 , NWA in the physical address space at this moment is PSN=1100. Since the LSN for PSN=1100 is LSN=0, logical NWA=0.

图13A中,主机装置305从驱动装置310得到逻辑NWA=0,指示在LSN=0上记录数据“A”。In FIG. 13A, host device 305 gets logical NWA=0 from drive device 310, indicating that data "A" is recorded on LSN=0.

另外,在记录数据“A”之后,轨道#1的LRA是指包含PSN=1100的ECC簇,所以其NWA是PSN=1132。由此,逻辑NWA=32。此时,主机装置305对逻辑NWA=32指示记录数据“B”。In addition, after recording data "A", the LRA of track #1 refers to an ECC cluster including PSN=1100, so its NWA is PSN=1132. Thus, logical NWA=32. At this time, the host device 305 instructs logical NWA=32 to record data "B".

在记录数据“B”之后,由于轨道#1的LRA是指包含PSN=1132的ECC簇内的物理扇区,所以其NWA是PSN=1164。所以逻辑NWA=64。After recording data "B", since the LRA of track #1 refers to a physical sector within the ECC cluster containing PSN=1132, its NWA is PSN=1164. So logical NWA=64.

上述逻辑NWA的确定方法的特征在于确定逻辑NWA,以维持初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射的关系。即,先根据轨道内的LRA确定NWA之后,利用初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射得到逻辑NWA,所以新的数据记录不需要交替管理信息1010B。The above method for determining the logical NWA is characterized in that the logical NWA is determined so as to maintain the initial logical address-physical address mapping relationship. That is, after the NWA is determined according to the LRA in the track, the logical NWA is obtained by using the initial logical address-physical address mapping, so the replacement management information 1010B is not needed for new data recording.

图14A中,尽管实际的最新逻辑NWA对应于LRA500B,但有时主机装置305也会保持对LRA501B的值,以作为逻辑NWA。In FIG. 14A , although the actual latest logical NWA corresponds to LRA500B, sometimes the host device 305 also holds the value of LRA501B as the logical NWA.

这种状态在如下情况下产生,即:由驱动装置310执行向PSN=1292的位置之后的记录,并作为独立于主机装置305的动作,另外,主机装置305未从驱动装置310取得最新的逻辑NWA。This state occurs when the drive device 310 performs recording to the position after PSN=1292 as an operation independent of the host device 305, and the host device 305 has not acquired the latest logic from the drive device 310. NWA.

若设在该状态下,主机装置305记录指示新的数据,则向对应于LRA501B的逻辑NWA发出记录指示,但实际的数据被驱动装置310记录到PSN=1336的位置。In this state, if the host device 305 records and instructs new data, it issues a recording instruction to the logical NWA corresponding to the LRA 501B, but the actual data is recorded by the drive device 310 at the position of PSN=1336.

由于该记录变为交替记录,所以需要新的交替管理信息。Since this record becomes an alternate record, new alternate management information is required.

另一方面,主机装置305若从驱动装置310取得对应于最新的LRA500B的逻辑NWA之后、执行新数据的记录指示,则其记录不构成交替记录,不需要新的交替管理信息。On the other hand, if the host device 305 acquires the logical NWA corresponding to the latest LRA 500B from the drive device 310 and executes a new data recording instruction, the recording does not constitute alternate recording, and new alternate management information is not required.

图15A和图16A也一样,各图中,有时主机装置305会保持对LRA501C的值,作为逻辑NWA,但实际的最新LRA分别是LRA500C和LRA500D。15A and 16A are the same. In each figure, the host device 305 may hold the value of LRA501C as the logical NWA, but the actual latest LRAs are LRA500C and LRA500D.

由此,期望主机装置305在记录新数据之前,取得最新的逻辑NWA。Therefore, it is desirable that the host device 305 acquires the latest logical NWA before recording new data.

综上所述,在主机装置305指示记录新数据时、例如图8A的步骤S102之前,输出从驱动装置310取得最新的逻辑NWA用的请求。另一方面,接收到该请求的驱动装置310通过上述步骤,将根据LRA和NWA确定的逻辑NWA返回到主机装置305。In summary, when the host device 305 instructs to record new data, for example, before step S102 in FIG. 8A , a request for acquiring the latest logical NWA from the drive device 310 is output. On the other hand, the drive device 310 that has received the request returns the logical NWA determined from the LRA and NWA to the host device 305 through the above steps.

接收到逻辑NWA的主机装置305根据该值,执行下面的记录指示。The host device 305 that has received the logical NWA executes the following recording instructions based on this value.

通过这种动作,在新数据的记录中不需要交替管理信息1010B,仅在执行了交替记录时才需要交替管理信息1010B。With such an operation, the replacement management information 1010B is unnecessary for recording of new data, and the replacement management information 1010B is required only when replacement recording is performed.

结果,可抑制交替管理信息列表1000的数据量增加,取得数据记录再现时的处理量的降低、存储器量的减少、信息记录媒体100上的数据容量的减少等效果。As a result, an increase in the data volume of the alternate management information list 1000 can be suppressed, and effects such as reduction in processing volume during data recording and reproduction, reduction in memory capacity, and reduction in data capacity on the information recording medium 100 can be obtained.

(实施方式3)(Embodiment 3)

3-1.记录处理步骤(1)3-1. Record processing steps (1)

在上述实施方式2的NWA确定方法中,产生未使用某个LSN的状况。In the NWA determination method of Embodiment 2 described above, a situation arises where a certain LSN is not used.

例如图14A中,若从主机装置305或文件系统看,则LSN=96的位置的逻辑扇区是一次也未记录数据的逻辑扇区。For example, in FIG. 14A, when viewed from the host device 305 or the file system, the logical sector at the position of LSN=96 is a logical sector to which no data has been recorded.

这种逻辑扇区被称为未记录逻辑扇区、或未使用逻辑扇区、孤立逻辑扇区等。Such a logical sector is called an unrecorded logical sector, or an unused logical sector, an orphan logical sector, or the like.

另外,将由这种未记录逻辑扇区构成的逻辑簇称为未记录逻辑簇。例如,图14A中,LSN=96-127的位置是未记录逻辑簇。In addition, a logical cluster composed of such unrecorded logical sectors is called an unrecorded logical cluster. For example, in FIG. 14A, the position of LSN=96-127 is an unrecorded logical cluster.

同样,图15A中,LSN=X2的位置是未记录逻辑扇区。Likewise, in FIG. 15A, the position of LSN=X2 is an unrecorded logical sector.

如图14A等所示,对于这种未记录逻辑扇区,也与其它通常的逻辑扇区一样,分配LSN,之后的逻辑扇区的LSN也未变化是上述实施方式中的NWA确定处理步骤的特征。As shown in FIG. 14A and the like, for such an unrecorded logical sector, an LSN is assigned in the same way as other normal logical sectors, and the LSN of subsequent logical sectors does not change. feature.

对这种未记录逻辑扇区执行记录指示的情况与上述实施方式一样,执行模拟重写记录。例如,考虑如下处理。In the case of executing a recording instruction for such an unrecorded logical sector, the pseudo-overwrite recording is performed as in the above-described embodiment. For example, consider the following processing.

这里,设在图14A的状态下,产生对LSN=96的位置的数据“F”的记录指示。Here, it is assumed that in the state shown in FIG. 14A, a recording instruction is issued for data "F" at the position of LSN=96.

此时,驱动装置310根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将LSN=96变换为PSN=1196。At this time, the drive device 310 converts LSN=96 to PSN=1196 according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

若比较PSN=1196与NWA,则可知PSN=1196已记录完成。Comparing PSN=1196 with NWA, it can be known that PSN=1196 has been recorded.

此时,与上述其它实施方式一样,执行模拟重写记录。At this time, as in the other embodiments described above, pseudo-overwrite recording is performed.

因此,驱动装置310在NWA所示的位置(此时为PSN=1336)记录数据“F”,还生成交替管理信息518。Therefore, the drive device 310 records the data "F" at the position indicated by NWA (PSN=1336 at this time), and also generates the replacement management information 518 .

通过这种处理,执行对LSN=96的位置的记录。结果,LSN=96不是未记录逻辑簇,而构成通常的逻辑簇。With this processing, recording of the position of LSN=96 is performed. As a result, LSN=96 is not an unrecorded logical cluster, but constitutes a normal logical cluster.

其中,通过初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射与PSN=1336的位置相关联的LSN=256-287的位置重新变为未记录逻辑簇。Among them, the location of LSN=256-287 associated with the location of PSN=1336 through the initial logical address-physical address mapping becomes an unrecorded logical cluster again.

并且,若执行数据“G”的记录,则变为图17A和图17B的状态。And, when the recording of the data "G" is performed, the state of FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B will be obtained.

3-2.再现处理步骤(1)3-2. Reproduction processing procedure (1)

图14A中,LSN=224的位置的逻辑簇是未记录逻辑簇。In FIG. 14A, the logical cluster at the position of LSN=224 is an unrecorded logical cluster.

利用初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射与LSN=224的位置的未记录逻辑簇对应的物理簇为PSN=1324的位置。The physical cluster corresponding to the unrecorded logical cluster at the position of LSN=224 is the position of PSN=1324 using the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

PSN=1324位置的物理簇还利用交替管理信息514,与PSN=1228的位置的物理簇相关联。The physical cluster at the location of PSN=1324 is also associated with the physical cluster at the location of PSN=1228 by using the replacement management information 514 .

另外,PSN=1228的位置的物理簇根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,与LSN=128的位置的逻辑簇映射。In addition, the physical cluster at the location of PSN=1228 is mapped to the logical cluster at the location of LSN=128 according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

即,PSN=1228的位置的物理簇被分配了LSN=128位置的逻辑簇、和LSN=224位置的未记录逻辑簇等两个逻辑簇。That is, the physical cluster at the position of PSN=1228 is assigned two logical clusters, namely, the logical cluster at the position of LSN=128 and the unrecorded logical cluster at the position of LSN=224.

下面,说明这两个逻辑簇被分配给一个物理簇的状态下、执行再现时的步骤。Next, the procedure for performing playback in a state where these two logical clusters are allocated to one physical cluster will be described.

首先,从主机装置305向LSN=128位置的逻辑簇发出再现指示,则首先驱动装置310根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射将接收到的LSN变换为PSN(称为再现目的地PSN)。First, the host device 305 sends a reproduction instruction to the logical cluster at LSN=128, and then the drive device 310 converts the received LSN into a PSN (referred to as the reproduction destination PSN) according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

这里,再现目的地PSN为PSN=1228。若对交替管理信息列表检索具有PSN=1228作为交替源的交替管理信息,则将发现交替管理信息514A。Here, the playback destination PSN is PSN=1228. If the replacement management information list is searched for replacement management information having PSN=1228 as the replacement source, replacement management information 514A will be found.

之后,再现交替管理信息514A所示的代替簇、即PSN=1324位置的物理簇。Thereafter, the replacement cluster indicated by the replacement management information 514A, that is, the physical cluster at the position of PSN=1324 is reproduced.

另一方面,在对LSN=224的位置的逻辑簇发出再现指示后,根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,得到PSN=1324的值,作为再现目的地PSN。但是,即便对交替管理信息列表检索具有作为交替源的PSN=1324的交替管理信息也未发现。On the other hand, after a reproduction instruction is issued to the logical cluster at the position of LSN=224, a value of PSN=1324 is obtained as the reproduction destination PSN based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping. However, even if the replacement management information list was searched for, the replacement management information having PSN=1324 as the replacement source was not found.

驱动装置310根据PSN=1324来再现数据。The drive device 310 reproduces data according to PSN=1324.

利用这种再现处理,即便在对逻辑上一次也未记录数据的未记录逻辑扇区发出再现指示的情况下,也可以从对应的物理扇区再现数据。With such reproduction processing, even when a reproduction instruction is issued to an unrecorded logical sector to which no data has been logically recorded once, data can be reproduced from the corresponding physical sector.

由此,若从主机侧的文件系统等看,则对于信息记录媒体100上的区域,没有例外的区域,不必在该系统构成中安装复杂的错误处理,可利用简单的安装来构筑系统。Therefore, when viewed from the file system on the host side, there are no exceptions to the area on the information recording medium 100, and it is not necessary to install complicated error handling in the system configuration, and the system can be constructed with simple installation.

在对未记录逻辑扇区执行再现指示时,若从上述对应的物理簇执行数据的再现,则会再现本来不应再现的数据。当这种数据再现在系统构成上不合适时,也可以使用如下的再现步骤。When reproduction instruction is executed for an unrecorded logical sector, if data reproduction is performed from the above-mentioned corresponding physical cluster, data that should not be reproduced will be reproduced. When such data reproduction is not suitable in terms of system configuration, the following reproduction procedure can also be used.

即,当再现数据时,根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将再现指定的LSN变换为PSN,对具有将所得到的PSN作为交替管理信息列表1000中的交替源位置信息1012的交替管理信息1010B进行检索。That is, when reproducing data, according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping, the LSN designated for reproduction is converted into a PSN, and the replacement management information 1010B having the obtained PSN as the replacement source position information 1012 in the replacement management information list 1000 to search.

一旦发现对应的交替源位置信息1012,则与上述其它实施方式一样,从交替目的地位置信息1013所示位置的ECC簇再现数据。Once the corresponding replacement source location information 1012 is found, data is reproduced from the ECC cluster at the location indicated by the replacement destination location information 1013 as in the other embodiments described above.

若未发现,则接着以交替目的地位置信息1013作为对象,对具有对应于再现指定的LSN的PSN值的交替源位置信息1012进行检索。If not found, next, the replacement source location information 1012 having the PSN value corresponding to the playback specified LSN is searched for the replacement destination location information 1013 .

若发现对应的交替目的地位置信息1013,则判断为由该交替目的地位置信息1013指示的ECC簇已经作为代替簇进行了记录。If the corresponding replacement destination position information 1013 is found, it is determined that the ECC cluster indicated by the replacement destination position information 1013 has already been recorded as a replacement cluster.

此时,驱动装置310不从该ECC簇再现数据,代之以从主机装置305返回规定的值、例如全部为0的值,作为再现数据。At this time, the drive device 310 does not reproduce data from the ECC cluster, but returns a predetermined value, for example, all 0 values from the host device 305 as the reproduced data.

通过这种再现处理,即便在对未记录逻辑扇区发出了再现指示的情况下,也可以从对应的物理扇区再现适当的数据。Through such reproduction processing, even when a reproduction instruction is issued for an unrecorded logical sector, appropriate data can be reproduced from the corresponding physical sector.

在参照图10说明的再现处理的各步骤中,驱动装置310从主机装置305接收了再现指示时执行这种再现处理。In each step of the playback process described with reference to FIG. 10 , when the drive device 310 receives a playback instruction from the host device 305 , it executes the playback process.

3-3.NWA确定步骤的比较3-3. Comparison of NWA determination steps

与上述实施方式不同,说明未产生未记录逻辑扇区的NWA确定步骤。Unlike the above-mentioned embodiment, the NWA determination procedure in which no unrecorded logical sectors are generated will be described.

在本NWA确定步骤中,管理逻辑LRA,在作为逻辑LRA相邻位置的逻辑NWA上记录新的数据。In this NWA determining step, the logical LRA is managed, and new data is recorded on the logical NWA adjacent to the logical LRA.

此时,利用初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将表示逻辑NWA的LSN变换为PSN(设为PSN-1)。At this time, the LSN representing the logical NWA is converted into a PSN (set as PSN-1) using the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

设对于该逻辑NWA,实际记录数据的ECC簇是包含LRA213所示的PSN的ECC簇的下一ECC簇,即NWA(将表示该NWA的位置的PSN设为PSN-2)。For this logical NWA, it is assumed that the ECC cluster in which data is actually recorded is the ECC cluster next to the ECC cluster including the PSN indicated by LRA 213 , that is, NWA (the PSN indicating the position of the NWA is PSN-2).

执行将该PSN-1设为交替源、将PSN-2设为交替目的地的交替记录。Alternate recording is performed in which PSN-1 is used as an alternate source and PSN-2 is used as an alternate destination.

此时,由于管理逻辑NWA,所以使用图25所示的轨道管理信息3210的不同实施方式。At this time, due to the management logic NWA, a different embodiment of the track management information 3210 shown in FIG. 25 is used.

由图25的轨道管理信息3210来重新定义轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214。The final data recording logical location information 3214 within a track is redefined by the track management information 3210 of FIG. 25 .

轨道内最终数据记录位置信息213用于管理基于PSN的逻辑地址空间中的最终记录位置,相反,轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214用于管理基于LSN的逻辑地址空间中的最终记录位置。In-track final data recording position information 213 is used to manage the final recording position in the PSN-based logical address space, whereas intra-track final data recording logical position information 3214 is used to manage the final recording position in the LSN-based logical address space.

驱动装置310可通过参照轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214,确定每个轨道的逻辑NWA。The drive device 310 can determine the logical NWA of each track by referring to the last data recording logical position information 3214 within the track.

轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214的更新方法如下所示。The update method of the final data recording logical position information 3214 in a track is as follows.

即,设定0,作为轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214的初始值。之后,从主机装置305接收到记录指示的驱动装置310接收记录位置,作为LSN。在接收到的LSN比轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214大的情况下,利用该LSN来更新轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214。That is, 0 is set as the initial value of the last data recording logical position information 3214 in a track. After that, the drive device 310 that has received the recording instruction from the host device 305 receives the recording position as an LSN. When the received LSN is larger than the last data recording logical position information 3214 in a track, the last data recording logical position information 3214 in a track is updated using this LSN.

通过这种处理,可将轨道内最终数据记录逻辑位置信息3214保持在最大值。Through this process, the final data recording logical position information 3214 within the track can be kept at the maximum value.

图26A中示出利用上述NWA确定步骤、按与图13A、图14A、图17A相同的顺序执行数据“A”、“B”、“C”、“D”、“F”、“G”的记录时的数据构造。In FIG. 26A, the data "A", "B", "C", "D", "F", and "G" are executed in the same order as in FIG. 13A, FIG. 14A, and FIG. 17A using the NWA determination steps described above Data structure when logging.

图26B中,登录了全部缺陷簇,作为交替管理信息(7)。其中,也可以从交替管理信息列表1000F中删除这些交替管理信息(7)。通过删除,可减小交替管理信息列表1000F中的容量。In FIG. 26B, all defective clusters are registered as replacement management information (7). However, these replacement management information may be deleted from the replacement management information list 1000F (7). By deletion, the capacity in the alternate management information list 1000F can be reduced.

这里,若比较图17B与图26B各自的交替管理信息列表1000E与1000F,则交替管理信息列表1000E中的交替管理信息数量变少。Here, when the replacement management information lists 1000E and 1000F in FIG. 17B and FIG. 26B are compared, the number of replacement management information in the replacement management information list 1000E becomes smaller.

若在删除交替管理信息(7)的状态下进行比较,则交替管理信息列表1000E中的交替管理信息数量更少。When the comparison is performed with the replacement management information ( 7 ) deleted, the number of replacement management information in the replacement management information list 1000E is smaller.

由此,实施方式1或实施方式2中说明的、产生未记录逻辑扇区的NWA的确定方法与参照图26A说明的未发生未记录逻辑扇区的方法相比,在抑制交替管理信息列表的数据容量方面很理想。Therefore, the method of specifying NWAs with unrecorded logical sectors described in Embodiment 1 or Embodiment 2 is more effective than the method described with reference to FIG. Data capacity is ideal.

在交替管理信息列表1000F中,通过残留交替管理信息(7),从而可事先把握信息记录媒体100上的缺陷簇的分布,并应用于当再现时一边避开它们、一边先读取数据等处理的最优化。In the replacement management information list 1000F, by leaving the replacement management information (7), the distribution of defective clusters on the information recording medium 100 can be grasped in advance, and it can be applied to processes such as reading data while avoiding them during reproduction. optimization.

(实施方式4)(Embodiment 4)

本实施方式中进一步描述数据的记录步骤。The step of recording data is further described in this embodiment.

图27是表示本实施方式的在执行数据记录之前的信息记录媒体100之一例数据构造的图。图中,

Figure GSA00000035133700511
所示的位置表示ECC簇之间的边界。下面,在其它图中也一样。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the information recording medium 100 before data recording is performed according to this embodiment. In the figure,
Figure GSA00000035133700511
The positions shown represent boundaries between ECC clusters. Next, the same applies to other figures.

说明在该状态下,从主机装置305向驱动装置310发出了数据“D1”4622与数据“E1”4623的记录指示时的记录步骤。In this state, the recording procedure when an instruction to record the data "D1" 4622 and the data "E1" 4623 is issued from the host device 305 to the drive device 310 will be described.

数据“D1”4622的记录指示例如是向已记录完成区域4600中的PSN=a0位置进行模拟重写记录。The recording instruction of the data "D1" 4622 is, for example, to perform pseudo-overwrite recording at the position PSN=a0 in the already-recorded area 4600 .

当执行记录指示时,主机装置305向驱动装置310请求逻辑NWA。When executing the recording instruction, the host device 305 requests the logical NWA from the drive device 310 .

请求了逻辑NWA的驱动装置310根据LRA4610A确定NWA4611A,将对应于NWA4611A的逻辑NWA返回到主机装置305。The drive device 310 that requested the logical NWA determines the NWA 4611A based on the LRA 4610A, and returns the logical NWA corresponding to the NWA 4611A to the host device 305 .

此时,主机装置305有时会对驱动装置310连续地执行向对应于PSN=a0的LSN=A0的数据“D1”4622的记录指示、以及向对应于NWA4611A(PSN=a2)的LSN=A2的数据“E1”4623的记录指示。At this time, the host device 305 may sequentially instruct the drive device 310 to record data "D1" 4622 corresponding to LSN=A0 corresponding to PSN=a0 and to record data "D1" 4622 corresponding to NWA4611A (PSN=a2) to LSN=A2. Record indication of data "E1" 4623.

驱动装置310若按主机装置305的记录指示所示,按数据“D1”4622、数据“E1”4623的顺序执行记录指示,则记录结果如图28所示。If the drive device 310 executes the recording instructions in the order of data "D1" 4622 and data "E1" 4623 as indicated by the recording instructions of the host device 305, the recording results are as shown in FIG. 28 .

这里,数据“D1”4622的记录指示为向已记录完成区域4600的模拟重写记录。由此,将数据“D1”4622交替为NWA4611A(PSN=a2)。之后,NWA4611A变为NWA4611B(PSN=a3)。Here, the recording of the data “D1” 4622 indicates a pseudo-overwrite recording to the already-recorded area 4600 . Thus, the data "D1" 4622 is alternately NWA4611A (PSN=a2). After that, NWA4611A becomes NWA4611B (PSN=a3).

利用该交替记录,PSN=a2的位置变为已记录完成,所以数据“E1”4623进一步被交替为NWA4611B(PNS=a3)。With this alternate recording, the position of PSN=a2 has already been recorded, so the data "E1" 4623 is further alternated to NWA4611B (PNS=a3).

如上所述,尽管主机装置305向对应于NWA4611A(PSN=a2)的LSN=A2发出了记录指示,但实际上记录在与之不同的位置(PSN=a3)上。As described above, although the host device 305 issued a recording instruction to LSN=A2 corresponding to NWA4611A (PSN=a2), it is actually recorded at a different location (PSN=a3).

由此,不仅会产生对数据“D1”4622A、还会产生对数据“E1”4223A的交替管理信息1010,导致交替管理信息列表1000的容量增加。As a result, replacement management information 1010 is generated not only for the data "D1" 4622A but also for the data "E1" 4223A, resulting in an increase in the capacity of the replacement management information list 1000 .

这种课题的原因在于由驱动装置实施了主机装置305未预期的交替记录。The reason for such a problem is that alternate recording that the host device 305 does not expect is performed by the drive device.

即,在驱动装置实施了交替记录之后,根据来自主机装置305的进一步的记录指示,需要交替处理,使交替管理信息列表1000的容量增加。That is, after alternate recording is performed by the drive device, alternate processing is required in response to a further recording instruction from the host device 305, and the capacity of the alternate management information list 1000 is increased.

另一方面,下面说明本实施方式的记录步骤中、未产生对数据“E1”4623的交替管理信息1010的方法。On the other hand, a method in which the replacement management information 1010 for the data "E1" 4623 is not generated in the recording procedure of this embodiment will be described below.

在本实施方式中,设在图27的状态下主机装置305执行记录指示的情况下,先执行补写的记录指示。In this embodiment, when the host device 305 executes a recording instruction in the state shown in FIG. 27 , it first executes an overwrite recording instruction.

之后,在补写的记录指示之后,执行重写记录的记录指示。这种记录步骤的结果构成图29的数据构造。After that, following the recording instruction of overwriting, the recording instruction of overwrite recording is executed. The result of this recording step constitutes the data structure of FIG. 29 .

在主机装置305上动作的文件系统执行所有文件的更新或新制作的管理,所以可确定记录指示的顺序。The file system operating on the host device 305 performs update or new creation management of all files, so the order of recording instructions can be determined.

图29中,数据“E1”4623B被记录在NWA4611A(PSN=a2)中。另外,数据“D1”4622B被记录在PSN=a4中。In FIG. 29, data "E1" 4623B is recorded in NWA 4611A (PSN=a2). In addition, data "D1" 4622B is recorded in PSN=a4.

如上所述,由于主机装置305对NWA4611A(PSN=a2)发出了记录指示,所以执行了记录指示的位置与实际记录的位置相同。由此,该记录不构成交替记录。As described above, since the host device 305 has issued a recording instruction to NWA4611A (PSN=a2), the location where the recording instruction is executed is the same as the actual recording location. Therefore, this recording does not constitute alternate recording.

即,不生成对数据“E1”4623的交替管理信息1010,可防止交替管理信息列表1000的容量增加。That is, the replacement management information 1010 for the data "E1" 4623 is not generated, and the capacity of the replacement management information list 1000 can be prevented from increasing.

在数据“D1”4622的记录中,即便在图28和图29中任意一个的情况下,也需要相同的交替管理信息1010。在图28和图29中,仅数据“D1”4622的记录位置(即交替目的地的位置)改变,所需要的交替管理信息1010的数量未变化。In the recording of the data "D1" 4622, the same replacement management information 1010 is required even in the case of either of FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 . In FIGS. 28 and 29, only the recording position of the data "D1" 4622 (ie, the position of the replacement destination) is changed, and the number of required replacement management information 1010 is not changed.

如上所述,本实施方式在主机装置305要执行重写记录与补写的情况下,通过对补写进行优先记录指示,可避免产生交替管理信息1010,并有效地减少交替管理信息列表1000的数据容量。As described above, in the present embodiment, when the host device 305 is to perform overwrite recording and overwrite, by giving priority recording instructions for overwrite, it is possible to avoid generation of replacement management information 1010 and effectively reduce the number of replacement management information lists 1000. data capacity.

(实施方式5)(Embodiment 5)

这里,考虑主机装置305按每个ECC簇的容量(例如64KB)分割某容量的数据,并按每个分割后的单位向驱动装置310依次执行记录指示的情形。Here, consider a case where the host device 305 divides data of a certain capacity for each ECC cluster capacity (for example, 64 KB), and sequentially instructs the drive device 310 to record for each divided unit.

驱动装置310在连续记录了这些数据时,有时在某个记录位置存在缺陷簇,为了代替该缺陷簇,而使用邻接的ECC簇。When the drive device 310 continuously records these data, there may be a defective cluster at a certain recording position, and an adjacent ECC cluster is used instead of the defective cluster.

在这种情况下,在此后的记录位置之后,所有记录按每一簇、沿PSN较大的方向交替记录数据。In this case, after the subsequent recording position, data is alternately recorded for each cluster in the direction in which the PSN is larger.

此时,每个记录单位都需要交替管理信息,在记录的数据容量大的情况下,必需大量的交替管理信息,交替管理信息列表1000的数据容量会变大。At this time, alternate management information is required for each recording unit, and when the volume of recorded data is large, a large amount of alternate management information is required, and the data capacity of the alternate management information list 1000 increases.

因此,本实施方式中,对交替记录中交替管理信息列表1000的数据容量减少很有效。参照图30来说明驱动装置310执行的代替簇的记录目的地选择步骤。Therefore, in this embodiment, it is effective to reduce the data capacity of the alternate management information list 1000 in alternate recording. Referring to FIG. 30 , a description will be given of the procedure of selecting a recording destination for a substitute cluster performed by the drive device 310 .

图30中,例如通过主机装置305发出的记录指示,执行将交替源簇5700设为交替源的交替记录。In FIG. 30 , alternate recording is executed with the alternate source cluster 5700 as the alternate source, for example, by a recording instruction from the host device 305 .

此时,利用如下步骤来确定交替目的地。At this time, the replacement destination is determined by the following procedure.

图30中,作为可分配代替簇的交替目的地,有未记录区域5601A(轨道#N 5602中)、未记录区域5612(轨道#N+15610中)、未记录区域5622(轨道#N+25620中)、未记录区域5623(轨道#N+35630中)。In FIG. 30, there are unrecorded area 5601A (in track #N 5602), unrecorded area 5612 (in track #N+15610), and unrecorded area 5622 (in track #N+25620) as alternative destinations where alternative clusters can be allocated. Middle), unrecorded area 5623 (in track #N+35630).

这里,调查从交替源簇5700的位置(例如交替源簇5700中的开头物理扇区)至交替目的地的候补位置(例如开放轨道的NWA位置)的距离。图30中,对于上述各交替目的地候补,分别为D13、D12、D10、D11。Here, the distance from the position of the replacement source cluster 5700 (for example, the first physical sector in the replacement source cluster 5700 ) to the candidate position of the replacement destination (for example, the NWA position of an open track) is investigated. In FIG. 30, the above-mentioned alternative destination candidates are D13, D12, D10, and D11, respectively.

这里,设各距离的值的大小关系为D13>D12>D11>D10。Here, the magnitude relation of the value of each distance is assumed to be D13>D12>D11>D10.

通过选择距离最近的(即D10的)未记录区域5622作为交替目的地,交替源至交替目的地的距离在此刻为最短,可使数据再现时访问时间最短。By selecting the unrecorded area 5622 with the shortest distance (that is, D10) as the replacement destination, the distance from the replacement source to the replacement destination is the shortest at this moment, and the access time during data reproduction can be minimized.

但是,未记录区域5622与交替源位置5700一样,包含于轨道#N+25620中。由此,若设交替目的地为未记录区域5622,则如上所述,在从主机装置305执行了连续的记录指示的情况下,产生交替管理信息列表1000的数据容量增加的课题。However, the unrecorded area 5622 is included in the track #N+2 5620 like the alternate source position 5700 . Thus, if the replacement destination is the unrecorded area 5622 , as described above, when consecutive recording instructions are executed from the host device 305 , a problem arises that the data capacity of the replacement management information list 1000 increases.

因此,在本实施方式中,特征在于,选择距离交替源簇最近的未记录区域作为交替目的地,但在该选择中,除去与交替源簇相同轨道内的未记录区域。Therefore, this embodiment is characterized in that the unrecorded area closest to the replacement source cluster is selected as the replacement destination, but in this selection, the unrecorded area in the same track as the replacement source cluster is removed.

即,除去距离最近的未记录区域5622,将具有下一较近距离的(即D11的)未记录区域5632设为交替目的地。That is, the unrecorded area 5622 having the shortest distance is removed, and the unrecorded area 5632 having the next shorter distance (that is, D11) is set as an alternate destination.

由此,在从主机装置305对交替源簇5700执行记录指示时,驱动装置310在未记录区域5632的NWA位置记录交替目的地簇5710。Thus, when the host device 305 executes a recording instruction for the replacement source cluster 5700 , the drive device 310 records the replacement destination cluster 5710 in the NWA position of the unrecorded area 5632 .

之后,生成并记录表示从交替源簇5700至交替目的地簇5710的映射的交替管理信息。After that, replacement management information indicating the mapping from the replacement source cluster 5700 to the replacement destination cluster 5710 is generated and recorded.

如参照步骤S107和S112(图8A)所说明的那样,本发明的驱动控制部311在执行模拟重写记录时,控制记录再现部314,以在用户数据区域108中的特定位置记录数据,该特定位置是由对应于接收到的记录指示中包含的逻辑地址的物理地址所示的位置以外的特定位置。As described with reference to steps S107 and S112 (FIG. 8A), the drive control unit 311 of the present invention controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 to record data at a specific position in the user data area 108 when performing pseudo-overwrite recording. The specific location is a specific location other than the location indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the received recording instruction.

在本实施例中,该特定位置是与步骤S 104(图8A)中确定的轨道不同的开放轨道内的NWA。In this embodiment, the specific location is an NWA within an open orbit different from the orbit determined in step S104 (FIG. 8A).

该开放轨道内的NWA表示距物理地址所示的位置最近的位置,该物理地址对应于记录指示中所包含的逻辑地址。The NWA in this open track indicates the closest position to the position indicated by the physical address corresponding to the logical address included in the recording instruction.

通过这种记录步骤,即便主机装置305进一步连续发出记录指示,即便向未记录区域5622执行新的数据记录,也不构成交替记录,不必追加交替管理信息。Through this recording procedure, even if the host device 305 continues to issue recording instructions, even if new data is recorded to the unrecorded area 5622, alternate recording is not constituted, and alternate management information does not need to be added.

从交替源至交替目的地的距离除相同轨道外最近。由此,可缩短数据再现中的访问时间。The distance from an alternate source to an alternate destination is the closest except for the same orbit. Thus, the access time in data reproduction can be shortened.

也可以仅将具有比交替源簇大的PSN的未记录区域作为对象,调查距离,确定交替目的地。这是因为在一次写型信息记录媒体中,由于沿PSN增加的方向执行按序记录,所以沿PSN增加的方向交替记录可有效执行数据的存取。此时,若没有具有较大PSN的未记录区域,则只要将具有较小的PSN的未记录区域设为对象即可。Alternatively, only the unrecorded area having a PSN larger than that of the replacement source cluster may be targeted, and the distance may be checked to determine the replacement destination. This is because in the write-once type information recording medium, since sequential recording is performed in the direction in which the PSN increases, alternate recording in the direction in which the PSN increases can efficiently perform data access. At this time, if there is no unrecorded area with a large PSN, it is only necessary to target an unrecorded area with a small PSN.

另外,在具有多个距离相等的未记录区域的情况下,期望选择PSN增加的方向。这是因为在一次写型信息记录媒体中,由于沿PSN增加的方向执行按序记录,所以沿PSN增加的方向交替记录可有效执行数据的存取。Also, in the case of having a plurality of unrecorded areas with equal distances, it is desirable to select a direction in which PSN increases. This is because in the write-once type information recording medium, since sequential recording is performed in the direction in which the PSN increases, alternate recording in the direction in which the PSN increases can efficiently perform data access.

交替源与交替目的地的距离也可以根据交替源与交替目的地的PSN值的差进行确定。或者,根据交替源与交替目的地的物理距离来确定。这是因为在信息记录媒体100中,有时PSN从内周侧开始螺旋状增加,所以PSN值的差与物理距离不一致。例如,尽管沿信息记录媒体100的半径方向邻接的ECC簇彼此物理上距离较近,但PSN值的差不是最小。The distance between the replacement source and the replacement destination may also be determined according to the difference between the PSN values of the replacement source and the replacement destination. Alternatively, it is determined based on the physical distance between the alternate source and the alternate destination. This is because in the information recording medium 100, PSN may increase spirally from the inner peripheral side, so the difference in PSN value does not correspond to the physical distance. For example, although ECC clusters adjacent in the radial direction of the information recording medium 100 are physically closer to each other, the difference in PSN value is not the smallest.

(实施方式6)(Embodiment 6)

本实施方式进一步描述数据的记录步骤。This embodiment further describes the steps of recording data.

5-1.数据构造5-1. Data structure

已描述了将本发明的信息记录媒体100的用户数据区域102分割成最小的访问单位、即物理扇区,以由多个物理扇区构成的ECC簇为最小单位,执行数据的记录再现。It has been described that the user data area 102 of the information recording medium 100 of the present invention is divided into the smallest access unit, ie, physical sectors, and data is recorded and reproduced using an ECC cluster composed of a plurality of physical sectors as the smallest unit.

在各ECC簇和物理扇区中,除了用户数据外,还包含地址信息、或各种控制信息、属性信息(用户控制数据)。Each ECC cluster and physical sector includes address information, various control information, and attribute information (user control data) in addition to user data.

这些信息还包括按物理扇区单位设定的信息,也包括按ECC簇单位设定的信息。This information also includes information set in units of physical sectors and information set in units of ECC clusters.

为了提高记录数据的可靠性,用户数据或用户控制数据在按ECC簇单位实施交织处理或加扰处理后,记录在信息记录媒体100上。In order to improve the reliability of recorded data, user data or user control data is recorded on the information recording medium 100 after being interleaved or scrambled in units of ECC clusters.

在本实施方式中,说明包含于ECC簇中的几个属性信息。In this embodiment, several pieces of attribute information included in an ECC cluster will be described.

如图34所示,对本发明的ECC簇中包含的各物理扇区分别设定Flag-A、Flag-B、Flag-C等属性信息。As shown in FIG. 34 , attribute information such as Flag-A, Flag-B, and Flag-C are set for each physical sector included in the ECC cluster of the present invention.

Flag-A为填充标记,表示记录在各物理扇区中的数据是从主机装置305提供的有效数据(Flag-A=0),还是驱动装置310为了埋入至ECC簇边界而记录的填充数据(例如全部为0的伪数据)(Flag-A=1)。填充数据是无效数据的一例。Flag-A is a padding flag indicating whether the data recorded in each physical sector is valid data provided from the host device 305 (Flag-A=0), or padding data recorded by the drive device 310 to be embedded in the ECC cluster boundary (For example, dummy data with all 0s) (Flag-A=1). Padding data is an example of invalid data.

在从主机装置305记录指示的数据容量不是ECC簇容量的整数倍的情况下,驱动装置310插入填充数据,使所记录数据的容量与ECC簇的边界一致。When the data capacity of the recording instruction from the host device 305 is not an integral multiple of the ECC cluster capacity, the drive device 310 inserts padding data so that the capacity of the recorded data matches the boundary of the ECC cluster.

Flag-B是有效性标记,表示记录在各物理扇区中的数据是有效数据(Flag-B=0)还是无效数据(Flag-B=1)。Flag-B is a validity flag, indicating whether the data recorded in each physical sector is valid data (Flag-B=0) or invalid data (Flag-B=1).

通常,由于非填充数据的各物理簇包含有效数据,所以Flag-B=0,但例如在执行RMW处理时,有时为Flag-B=1。Normally, Flag-B=0 because each physical cluster of non-stuff data includes valid data, but Flag-B=1 may be set when RMW processing is performed, for example.

即,在用于交替记录的RMW处理中,有时不能再现某个物理扇区。That is, in the RMW process for alternate recording, sometimes a certain physical sector cannot be reproduced.

当存在这种不能再现的物理扇区时,对应的交替目的地的物理扇区中不存在应记录的数据。When there is such an unreproducible physical sector, there is no data to be recorded in the corresponding alternate destination physical sector.

如参照图8B所述,在RMW处理中,当从物理扇区再现了数据之后,需要再次使数据写回。从而,在图8B所示的步骤S153中,若从某个物理扇区再现失败,则不能使数据写回,会产生记录错误。As described with reference to FIG. 8B , in the RMW process, after data has been reproduced from the physical sector, it is necessary to write the data back again. Therefore, in step S153 shown in FIG. 8B, if reproduction from a certain physical sector fails, the data cannot be written back, and a recording error occurs.

因此,在本实施方式中,驱动装置310的驱动控制部311在不存在应记录数据的交替目的地的物理扇区中,记录无效数据(例如00h等伪数据)。Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 records invalid data (for example, dummy data such as 00h) in a physical sector where there is no alternate destination of data to be recorded.

驱动控制部311对记录了伪数据的物理扇区设定Flag-B=1。Flag-B=1表示未记录有效数据。The drive control unit 311 sets Flag-B=1 to the physical sector in which the dummy data is recorded. Flag-B=1 means no valid data is recorded.

通过这种数据记录的步骤,可避免RMW处理中的错误发生。Through this data recording procedure, errors in RMW processing can be avoided.

Flag-C是更新性标记,是对代替簇中的各物理扇区设定的标记。Flag-C is an update flag, which is set for each physical sector in the replacement cluster.

在包含于代替簇中的各物理扇区的数据是变更了来自交替源的数据的数据的情况下,设定Flag-C=0,作为有更新。另一方面,在不执行变更,而原样记录了更新源的数据的情况下,设定Flag-C=1,作为无更新。When the data of each physical sector included in the replacement cluster is changed from the data from the replacement source, Flag-C=0 is set as update. On the other hand, when the data of the update source is recorded without performing the change, Flag-C=1 is set as no update.

并且,本实施方式的各ECC簇具有交替前位置信息,作为其属性信息之一。交替前位置信息的设定步骤细节如后所述。Furthermore, each ECC cluster in this embodiment has pre-alternation position information as one of its attribute information. The details of the setting procedure of the pre-alternation position information will be described later.

在本实施方式中,对参照图11说明的状态信息1011进一步追加标志信息。In this embodiment, flag information is further added to the state information 1011 described with reference to FIG. 11 .

这里,如图35所示的交替管理信息1010C所示,作为Flag4,可判断交替源位置信息1012所指示的ECC簇中包含的数据种类。Here, as shown in the replacement management information 1010C shown in FIG. 35 , as Flag4, the type of data included in the ECC cluster indicated by the replacement source location information 1012 can be determined.

这里,所谓数据种类是根据交替源位置信息1012所指的簇中包含的数据与交替目的地位置信息1013所指的簇中包含的数据之间的关系所确定的信息。Here, the data type is information determined based on the relationship between the data contained in the cluster indicated by the replacement source position information 1012 and the data contained in the cluster indicated by the replacement destination position information 1013 .

具体而言,第1数据种类相当于交替源位置信息1012表示缺陷簇的情况。设此时的Flag4的值例如为“00”。Specifically, the first data type corresponds to a case where the replacement source position information 1012 indicates a defective cluster. Let the value of Flag4 at this time be "00", for example.

第2数据种类相当于更新交替源位置信息1012所指的簇中包含的数据,利用模拟重写,在交替目的地位置信息1013所示的簇中记录了更新后的数据的情况。设此时的Flag4的值例如为“01”。The second data type corresponds to updating the data included in the cluster indicated by the replacement source position information 1012 and recording the updated data in the cluster indicated by the replacement destination position information 1013 by pseudo-overwriting. Let the value of Flag4 at this time be "01", for example.

第3数据种类相当于与交替源位置信息1012所示的簇中包含的数据无关,利用模拟重写,在该位置上对交替目的地位置信息1013所指的簇记录了数据的情况。设此时的Flag4的值例如为“10”。The third data type corresponds to a case where data is recorded in the cluster indicated by the replacement destination location information 1013 by pseudo-overwriting irrespective of the data included in the cluster indicated by the replacement source location information 1012 . Let the value of Flag4 at this time be "10", for example.

例如,根据上述实施方式,图13B所示的交替管理信息512相当于Flag4=00。另外,图14B所示的交替管理信息514A或图39B所示的交替管理信息6200相当于Flag4=01。图17B所示的交替管理信息518相当于Flag4=10。For example, according to the above-described embodiment, the replacement management information 512 shown in FIG. 13B corresponds to Flag4=00. In addition, the replacement management information 514A shown in FIG. 14B or the replacement management information 6200 shown in FIG. 39B corresponds to Flag4=01. The replacement management information 518 shown in FIG. 17B corresponds to Flag4=10.

如交替管理信息6200所示,与Flag4相同的信息包含于上述图18所示的DFL条目2010中的情况下,例如只要包含于状态2 2011B中即可。例如,使状态2 2011B的值为“1000”的情况下对应于Flag4=01的情况。As shown in the replacement management information 6200, when the same information as Flag4 is included in the DFL entry 2010 shown in FIG. 18, it only needs to be included in the state 2 2011B, for example. For example, when the value of State 2 2011B is "1000", it corresponds to the case where Flag4=01.

该Flag4在数据记录时被设定。例如在图8A的步骤S113中,设定Flag4的信息。或者,设定相当于Flag4的状态2 2011B。Flag4的设定步骤的细节如后所述。This Flag4 is set at the time of data recording. For example, in step S113 of FIG. 8A , the information of Flag4 is set. Alternatively, set state 2 2011B equivalent to Flag4. The details of the setting procedure of Flag4 will be described later.

5-2.记录处理步骤5-2. Record processing steps

参照图36A、图36B和图36C,说明本实施方式的数据记录的步骤。这里,设使用图6所示的信息记录再现装置300,将数据记录在信息记录媒体100上。The procedure of data recording in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36A , 36B, and 36C. Here, it is assumed that data is recorded on the information recording medium 100 using the information recording and reproducing apparatus 300 shown in FIG. 6 .

图36A表示图8B所示的步骤S156的处理的详细实例。图36A所示的各步骤由驱动装置310的驱动控制部311执行。Fig. 36A shows a detailed example of the processing of step S156 shown in Fig. 8B. Each step shown in FIG. 36A is executed by the drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 .

在图8B的步骤S156之前,利用图8B的步骤S153或步骤S154来实施读处理,之后,利用步骤S155来实施更改处理。Before step S156 in FIG. 8B , read processing is performed in step S153 or step S154 in FIG. 8B , and thereafter, modification processing is performed in step S155 .

在步骤S153和步骤S154中,在再现成功的情况下,驱动控制部311将再现的数据保持在存储器电路312中,在交替源ECC簇中存在再现失败的物理扇区的情况下,驱动控制部311为了生成应记录在交替目的地ECC簇中的数据,将用于记录在对应于交替源ECC簇内再现失败的物理扇区的交替目的地ECC簇内的物理扇区中的无效数据、即伪数据插入到保持在存储器电路312中的数据中。In steps S153 and S154, if the reproduction is successful, the drive control section 311 stores the reproduced data in the memory circuit 312, and if there is a physical sector in which the reproduction fails in the alternate source ECC cluster, the drive control section 311 311 In order to generate the data to be recorded in the replacement destination ECC cluster, use invalid data recorded in the physical sector in the replacement destination ECC cluster corresponding to the physical sector that failed to be reproduced in the replacement source ECC cluster, that is, Dummy data is inserted into data held in the memory circuit 312 .

接着,在步骤S155中,利用记录指示所示的数据,更改保持在存储器电路132中的应记录数据。Next, in step S155, the data to be recorded held in the memory circuit 132 is changed using the data indicated by the recording instruction.

将以上结果作为应记录数据,保持在存储器电路132中。The above results are held in the memory circuit 132 as data to be recorded.

下面,详细说明图36A所示的各步骤。Next, each step shown in FIG. 36A will be described in detail.

(步骤S501)驱动控制部311确定应记录在信息记录媒体100上的数据。(Step S501 ) The drive control unit 311 specifies data to be recorded on the information recording medium 100 .

(步骤S502)驱动控制部311设定保持在存储器电路312中的、从其开始记录的数据的属性信息。(Step S502 ) The drive control unit 311 sets attribute information of data held in the memory circuit 312 from which to start recording.

在步骤S151(图8B)中判断为需要RMW处理的情况下,原样保持作为步骤S153或步骤S154中的再现结果所得到的属性信息的值。When it is determined in step S151 ( FIG. 8B ) that RMW processing is necessary, the value of the attribute information obtained as a result of playback in step S153 or step S154 is retained as it is.

在步骤S153与S154中,在交替源ECC簇中存在再现失败的物理扇区的情况下,作为应记录在交替目的地中的数据,插入无效数据,即伪数据,作为应记录在对应于交替源ECC簇内再现失败的物理扇区的交替目的地ECC簇内的物理扇区中的数据。在步骤S502中,对插入了无效数据的物理扇区所对应的Flag-B设定“1”。In steps S153 and S154, in the case where there is a physical sector that fails to be reproduced in the replacement source ECC cluster, as data that should be recorded in the replacement destination, invalid data, that is, dummy data, is inserted as data that should be recorded in the data corresponding to the replacement destination. The data in the physical sector in the alternate destination ECC cluster of the failed physical sector is reproduced in the source ECC cluster. In step S502, "1" is set to Flag-B corresponding to the physical sector in which the invalid data is inserted.

在步骤S155(图8B)中,对实施了RMW处理的更改处理之后的物理扇区,设定Flag-C=0。In step S155 (FIG. 8B), Flag-C=0 is set for the physical sector after the modification process of the RMW process is performed.

(步骤S503)驱动控制部311设定保持在存储器电路312中的针对应记录数据的交替前位置信息。(Step S503 ) The drive control unit 311 sets the pre-alternation position information for the corresponding recording data held in the memory circuit 312 .

在步骤S155(图8B)中,在确定为包含由记录指示所指定的位置的ECC簇未交替完成(即根据记录指示所执行的数据记录是第1次模拟重写记录)的情况下,对交替前位置信息设定表示交替源簇的地址的信息。交替源簇的地址表示由记录指示所指定的位置(例如,根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将由记录指示所指定的逻辑地址变换为物理地址,由包含该物理地址的ECC簇的开头PSN值表示的位置)。In step S155 (FIG. 8B), when it is determined that the ECC cluster containing the position specified by the recording instruction has not been alternately completed (that is, the data recording performed according to the recording instruction is the first simulated overwrite recording), the The location information before replacement sets information indicating the address of the replacement source cluster. The address of the alternate source cluster represents the location specified by the record indication (for example, according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping, the logical address specified by the record indication is transformed into a physical address, and the beginning PSN value of the ECC cluster containing the physical address indicated location).

在步骤S151(图8B)中,在确定为包含由记录指示所指定的位置的ECC簇已被交替为交替簇(即根据记录指示执行的数据记录是第2次之后的模拟重写记录)的情况下,对交替前位置信息设定表示已交替的交替簇地址的信息,以便指示之前的交替目的地簇。In step S151 (FIG. 8B), when it is determined that the ECC cluster containing the position specified by the recording instruction has been alternated as an alternate cluster (that is, the data recording performed according to the recording instruction is the simulated overwrite recording after the second time) In this case, information indicating the address of the replacement cluster that has been replaced is set in the position information before replacement so as to indicate the previous replacement destination cluster.

该之前的交替目的地簇的地址例如已在步骤S151(图8B)中从交替管理信息中取得。The address of the previous replacement destination cluster has already been acquired from the replacement management information in step S151 ( FIG. 8B ), for example.

在上述步骤S502(图36A)中,在交替目的地簇中具有设定了Flag-B=1的物理扇区的情况下,在图8A的步骤S113中,将管理该交替处理的交替管理信息的状态2 2011B设定为“1000”。In the above step S502 (FIG. 36A), if there is a physical sector in which Flag-B=1 is set in the replacement destination cluster, in step S113 of FIG. 8A, the replacement management information for the replacement process will be managed. The state of 2 2011B is set to "1000".

图36B表示图8B所示的步骤S157的处理的详细实例。图36B所示的各步骤由驱动装置310的驱动控制部311执行。Fig. 36B shows a detailed example of the processing of step S157 shown in Fig. 8B. Each step shown in FIG. 36B is executed by the drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 .

(步骤S506)驱动控制部311将由记录指示所指定的数据确定为应记录在信息记录媒体100上的数据。(Step S506 ) The drive control unit 311 specifies the data designated by the recording instruction as the data to be recorded on the information recording medium 100 .

(步骤S507)驱动控制部311设定保持在存储器电路312中的、对从其开始记录的数据的属性信息。(Step S507) The drive control section 311 sets the attribute information held in the memory circuit 312 for the data from which recording is started.

对包含于ECC簇的属性信息中的各标志设定规定的值。例如,设定Flag-A=0、Flag-B=0、Flag-C=0。A predetermined value is set for each flag included in the attribute information of the ECC cluster. For example, set Flag-A=0, Flag-B=0, and Flag-C=0.

将结果作为应记录的数据,保持在存储器电路312中。The result is held in the memory circuit 312 as data to be recorded.

(步骤S508)驱动控制部311设定保持在存储器电路312中的、对从其开始记录的数据的交替前位置信息。(Step S508 ) The drive control unit 311 sets the pre-alternation position information for the data from which the recording starts, which is held in the memory circuit 312 .

该步骤与图36A的S503相同。This step is the same as S503 in Fig. 36A.

图36C表示图8A所示的步骤S109的处理的详细实例。图36C所示的各步骤由驱动装置310的驱动控制部311执行。Fig. 36C shows a detailed example of the processing of step S109 shown in Fig. 8A. Each step shown in FIG. 36C is executed by the drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 .

(步骤S511)驱动控制部311确定应记录的数据。具体而言,驱动控制部311将由记录指示所指定的数据确定为应记录的数据。(Step S511) The drive control unit 311 specifies data to be recorded. Specifically, the drive control unit 311 specifies the data designated by the recording instruction as the data to be recorded.

此时,驱动控制部311判断由记录指示所指定的数据终端是否与ECC簇边界一致。在不一致的情况下,插入填充数据(例如全部为00h的数据),使数据的终端与ECC簇边界一致,并确定为应记录的数据。At this time, the drive control unit 311 judges whether or not the end of the data specified by the recording instruction coincides with the ECC cluster boundary. In the case of inconsistency, padding data (for example, data of all 00h) is inserted so that the end of the data coincides with the ECC cluster boundary, and is determined as data to be recorded.

(步骤S512)驱动控制部311设定保持在存储器电路312中的、对从其开始记录的数据的属性信息。(Step S512) The drive control section 311 sets the attribute information held in the memory circuit 312 for the data from which the recording is started.

对包含于ECC簇的属性信息中的各标志设定初始值。例如,设定Flag-A=0、Flag-B=0、Flag-C=1。Initial values are set for each flag included in the attribute information of the ECC cluster. For example, set Flag-A=0, Flag-B=0, and Flag-C=1.

其中,对步骤S511中记录了填充数据的物理扇区设定Flag-A=1。Among them, Flag-A=1 is set for the physical sector in which the padding data is recorded in step S511.

将结果作为应记录的数据,保持在存储器电路312中。The result is held in the memory circuit 312 as data to be recorded.

(步骤S512)驱动控制部311设定保持在存储器电路312中的、对从其开始记录的数据的交替前位置信息。(Step S512 ) The drive control unit 311 sets the pre-alternation position information for the data from which the recording starts, which is held in the memory circuit 312 .

在本步骤中,对交替前位置信息设定表示非交替记录的信息。In this step, information indicating non-alternate recording is set in the pre-alternate position information.

例如设定全部为“0”的值。For example, all values are set to "0".

5-3.再现处理步骤5-3. Reproduction processing procedure

参照图37,说明本实施方式的数据再现的步骤。这里,设使用图6所示的信息记录再现装置300,从信息记录媒体100再现数据。Referring to Fig. 37, the procedure of data reproduction in this embodiment will be described. Here, it is assumed that data is reproduced from the information recording medium 100 using the information recording and reproducing apparatus 300 shown in FIG. 6 .

图37所示的各步骤由驱动装置310的驱动控制部311执行。Each step shown in FIG. 37 is executed by the drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 .

(步骤S651)驱动控制部311接收再现指示。(Step S651) The drive control unit 311 receives a playback instruction.

(步骤S652)驱动控制部311根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将表示再现指示中包含的再现位置的逻辑地址变换为物理地址。(Step S652) The drive control unit 311 converts the logical address indicating the playback position included in the playback instruction into a physical address based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

(步骤S653)驱动控制部311检索交替管理信息,该交替管理信息包括具有步骤S652中所得到的物理地址的ECC簇的开头PSN,并作为交替源。(Step S653) The drive control unit 311 searches for the replacement management information including the head PSN of the ECC cluster having the physical address obtained in step S652 as the replacement source.

若发现该交替管理信息,则处理前进到S654。若未发现该交替管理信息,则处理前进到S655。If the replacement management information is found, the process proceeds to S654. If the replacement management information is not found, the process proceeds to S655.

(步骤S654)驱动控制部311设定步骤S653中发现的交替管理信息表示为交替目的地的物理地址,并作为再现位置。(Step S654) The drive control unit 311 sets the physical address indicated as the replacement destination by the replacement management information found in step S653 as the reproduction position.

(步骤S655)驱动控制部311设定物理地址并作为再现位置,该物理地址通过基于初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射来变换由再现指示所指定的逻辑地址而得到。(Step S655) The drive control unit 311 sets a physical address obtained by converting the logical address specified by the playback instruction based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping, as the playback position.

(步骤S656)驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以便根据此前的步骤中所设定的再现位置来再现数据。(Step S656) The drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 so as to reproduce data based on the reproduction position set in the previous step.

驱动控制部311利用错误检测修正功能,确定再现是否成功。The drive control unit 311 uses the error detection and correction function to determine whether reproduction has succeeded.

在所有物理扇区的再现成功的情况下,结束再现处理。When reproduction of all physical sectors is successful, the reproduction process ends.

在存在再现失败的物理扇区的情况下,处理前进到步骤S657。In a case where there is a physical sector whose reproduction failed, the process proceeds to step S657.

(步骤S657)驱动控制部311确定是否能对再现失败的物理扇区再执行再现处理。(Step S657) The drive control section 311 determines whether the reproduction process can be re-executed for the physical sector whose reproduction failed.

确定是否对再现失败的物理扇区设定Flag-B=1。It is determined whether to set Flag-B=1 for the physical sector whose reproduction failed.

在确定为设定Flag-B=1的情况下,处理前进到步骤S659。此时,通过从交替前位置信息所示的位置执行数据再现的再执行,由此可从再现错误中恢复。In a case where it is determined that Flag-B=1 is set, the process proceeds to step S659. At this time, by re-executing data reproduction from the position indicated by the pre-alternation position information, it is possible to recover from a reproduction error.

或者,在步骤S653中判断为有交替目的地的情况下,判断交替管理信息的Flag4是否为“01”(或状态2 2011B为“1000”)。当步骤S656的再现失败、不能再现Flag-B时,基于Flag4的判定尤其有效。Alternatively, if it is determined in step S653 that there is a replacement destination, it is judged whether Flag4 of the replacement management information is "01" (or the status 2 2011B is "1000"). The determination based on Flag4 is particularly effective when playback in step S656 fails and Flag-B cannot be played back.

若判断为Flag4为“01”,则处理前进到S659。If it is determined that Flag4 is "01", the process proceeds to S659.

在此外的情况下(还包含步骤S653中未判断为无交替目的地的情况),处理前进到S658。In other cases (including the case where it is not determined in step S653 that there is no replacement destination), the process proceeds to S658.

(步骤S658)驱动控制部311确定产生了再现错误。结果,再现处理结束。(Step S658) The drive control section 311 determines that a reproduction error has occurred. As a result, the reproduction processing ends.

(步骤S659)驱动控制部311设定交替前位置信息所示的物理地址,作为再现位置。(Step S659) The drive control unit 311 sets the physical address indicated by the pre-alternation position information as the reproduction position.

(步骤S660)驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以便根据此前的步骤中所设定的再现位置来再现数据。(Step S660) The drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproducing unit 314 so as to reproduce data based on the reproduction position set in the previous step.

利用错误检测修正功能,判断再现是否成功。Use the error detection and correction function to judge whether the reproduction is successful or not.

在成功的情况下,再现处理结束。此时,将从交替目的地簇内设定了Flag-B=1的物理扇区所对应的物理扇区再现的数据输出到主机装置305。In case of success, the reproduction process ends. At this time, the data reproduced from the physical sector corresponding to the physical sector in which Flag-B=1 is set in the replacement destination cluster is output to the host device 305 .

在失败的情况下,处理前进到步骤S658。In case of failure, the process proceeds to step S658.

在对未记录逻辑扇区执行再现指示时,如步骤S656所述,若从对应的物理扇区执行数据的再现,则再现原本不应再现的数据。产生这种数据再现故障的情况下,也可以使用如下的再现步骤。When the reproduction instruction is executed for the unrecorded logical sector, as described in step S656, if the data reproduction is performed from the corresponding physical sector, the data that should not be reproduced originally is reproduced. When such a data reproduction failure occurs, the following reproduction procedure can also be used.

即,当再现数据时,根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将再现指定的LSN变换为PSN,对具有将所得到的PSN作为交替管理信息列表1000中的交替源位置信息1012的交替管理信息1010B进行检索。若未发现对应的交替源位置信息1012,则从所得到的PSN的物理扇区再现数据。That is, when reproducing data, according to the initial logical address-physical address mapping, the LSN designated for reproduction is converted into a PSN, and the replacement management information 1010B having the obtained PSN as the replacement source position information 1012 in the replacement management information list 1000 to search. If no corresponding alternate source location information 1012 is found, data is reproduced from the resulting physical sector of the PSN.

此时,从包含再现的物理扇区的ECC簇取得交替前位置信息,调查交替前位置信息中是否登录了有效的值。在交替前位置信息中登录了有效值的情况下,可知该ECC簇是未记录逻辑簇,所以驱动装置310不将从该ECC簇再现的数据返回到主机装置305,代之以返回规定值、例如全部为0的值,作为再现数据。At this time, the pre-alternation position information is acquired from the ECC cluster including the physical sector to be reproduced, and it is checked whether a valid value is registered in the pre-alternation position information. If a valid value is registered in the pre-alternation position information, it can be seen that the ECC cluster is an unrecorded logical cluster, so the drive device 310 does not return the data reproduced from the ECC cluster to the host device 305, but instead returns a predetermined value, For example, all values of 0 are used as reproduction data.

另外,也可以代替调查交替前位置信息,调查Flag-A。取得对应于再现的物理扇区的Flag-A,调查Flag-A的值。由于Flag-A=1的情况下可知该物理扇区为未记录逻辑扇区,所以驱动装置310不将从该物理扇区再现的数据返回到主机装置305,代之以返回规定值、例如全部为0的值,作为再现数据。In addition, instead of checking the pre-alternation position information, Flag-A may be checked. Flag-A corresponding to the reproduced physical sector is acquired, and the value of Flag-A is checked. When Flag-A=1, it can be seen that the physical sector is an unrecorded logical sector, so the drive device 310 does not return the data reproduced from the physical sector to the host device 305, but instead returns a predetermined value, for example, all A value of 0 is used as reproduction data.

另外,也可以调查Flag-B。同样,取得对应于再现的物理扇区的Flag-B,并调查该值。由于Flag-B=1的情况下可知该物理扇区为未记录逻辑扇区,所以驱动装置310不将从该物理扇区再现的数据返回到主机装置305,代之以返回规定值、例如全部为0的值,作为再现数据。In addition, Flag-B can also be checked. Similarly, Flag-B corresponding to the reproduced physical sector is obtained, and the value is checked. When Flag-B=1, it can be seen that the physical sector is an unrecorded logical sector, so the drive device 310 does not return the data reproduced from the physical sector to the host device 305, but instead returns a predetermined value, for example, all A value of 0 is used as reproduction data.

另外,也可以调查Flag-C。同样,取得对应于再现的物理扇区的Flag-C,并调查该值。由于Flag-C=0的情况下可知该物理扇区为未记录逻辑扇区,所以驱动装置310不将从该物理扇区再现的数据返回到主机装置305,代之以返回规定值、例如全部为0的值,作为再现数据。In addition, Flag-C can also be checked. Similarly, Flag-C corresponding to the reproduced physical sector is obtained, and the value is checked. When Flag-C=0, it can be seen that the physical sector is an unrecorded logical sector, so the drive device 310 does not return the data reproduced from the physical sector to the host device 305, but instead returns a predetermined value, for example, all A value of 0 is used as reproduction data.

通过这种再现处理,即便在对未记录逻辑扇区发出再现指示的情况下,也可以从对应的物理扇区再现适当的数据。Through such reproduction processing, even when a reproduction instruction is issued for an unrecorded logical sector, appropriate data can be reproduced from the corresponding physical sector.

5-4.记录和再现处理的实例5-4. Example of recording and reproduction processing

下面,说明基于图36A~图36C和图37所示的数据记录和再现步骤的具体处理的实例。Next, an example of specific processing based on the data recording and reproducing steps shown in FIGS. 36A to 36C and FIG. 37 will be described.

例如,设图34中,利用来自主机装置305的记录指示,在用户数据区域中的ECC簇#i 6000中重新记录了数据“A0”。此时,对记录了数据“A0”的物理扇区603的各标记的值变为Flag-A=0、Flag-B=0、Flag-C=0。For example, assume that in FIG. 34, data "A0" is newly recorded in ECC cluster #i 6000 in the user data area by a recording instruction from the host device 305. At this time, the values of the flags for the physical sector 603 in which the data "A0" is recorded are Flag-A=0, Flag-B=0, and Flag-C=0.

另外,由于从主机装置305提供的数据“A0”的容量与ECC簇边界不一致,所以ECC簇#i 6000的剩余部分被驱动装置310记录无效数据、即填充数据。对记录了填充数据的物理扇区的各标记的值为Flag-A=1、Flag-B=0等。Also, since the capacity of the data "A0" supplied from the host device 305 does not match the ECC cluster boundary, the remaining part of the ECC cluster #i 6000 is recorded with invalid data, that is, padding data, by the drive device 310. The value of each flag for the physical sector in which padding data is recorded is Flag-A=1, Flag-B=0, and so on.

下面,若对于图34的状态,主机装置305对ECC簇#i 6000中的PSN=a1指示记录数据“B1”,则记录结果如图38A所示。Next, in the state of FIG. 34, if the host device 305 instructs PSN=a1 in the ECC cluster #i 6000 to record data "B1", the recording result is as shown in FIG. 38A.

在图34的状态下,ECC簇#i 6000已记录完成,所以执行RMW处理与交替处理。即,驱动装置310再现ECC簇#i 6000。对再现后的数据“A0”插入数据“B1”,还更新所需要的标记值。另外,插入填充数据,直到ECC簇的边界。In the state of FIG. 34, the ECC cluster #i 6000 has already been recorded, so the RMW process and alternate process are executed. That is, the drive device 310 reproduces the ECC cluster #i 6000. Data "B1" is inserted into reproduced data "A0", and necessary flag values are also updated. In addition, padding data is inserted up to the boundary of the ECC cluster.

将如此得到的数据记录在作为未记录区域的ECC簇#i+1 6001中。生成将ECC簇#i 6000设为交替源、将ECC簇#i+1 6001设为交替目的地的交替管理信息1010。The data thus obtained is recorded in ECC cluster #i+1 6001 which is an unrecorded area. The replacement management information 1010 is generated with ECC cluster #i 6000 as the replacement source and ECC cluster #i+1 6001 as the replacement destination.

如图38A所示,对ECC簇#i+1 6001中记录了数据“A0”的物理扇区的Flag-C的值为1。这是因为,在上述RMW处理中,驱动装置310将数据“A0”从ECC簇#i原样拷贝到ECC簇#i+1,未进行更新。As shown in FIG. 38A, the value of Flag-C is 1 for the physical sector in which data "A0" is recorded in ECC cluster #i+1 6001. This is because, in the aforementioned RMW process, the drive device 310 copies the data "A0" from the ECC cluster #i to the ECC cluster #i+1 without updating it.

下面,对于图38A的状态,若设主机装置305指示了在ECC簇#i6000中记录数据“C2”,则记录结果如图39A所示。Next, assuming that the host device 305 instructs to record data "C2" in the ECC cluster #i6000 in the state of FIG. 38A, the recording result is as shown in FIG. 39A.

此时也同样,由于ECC簇#i 6000已记录完成,所以执行RMW处理与交替处理。即,驱动装置310再现ECC簇#i+1 6001。之后,对再现的数据执行数据“C2”和填充数据的插入以及必要的标记值的更新。将得到的数据记录到作为未记录区域的ECC簇#i+2 6002。并且,生成图39B所示的将ECC簇#i 6000设为交替源、将ECC簇#i+2设为交替目的地的交替管理信息6200。Also at this time, since the ECC cluster #i 6000 has already been recorded, RMW processing and alternate processing are executed. That is, the drive device 310 reproduces the ECC cluster #i+1 6001. After that, insertion of data "C2" and stuffing data and necessary updating of flag values are performed on the reproduced data. The resulting data is recorded to ECC cluster #i+2 6002 which is an unrecorded area. Then, the replacement management information 6200 shown in FIG. 39B is generated in which ECC cluster #i 6000 is the replacement source and ECC cluster #i+2 is the replacement destination.

这里,设在ECC簇#i+1 6001的再现中,数据“A0”的再现失败。若在以前,由于该失败,不能前进到RMW处理,记录发生错误。Here, it is assumed that playback of data "A0" fails during playback of ECC cluster #i+1 6001. If previously, due to this failure, it was not possible to proceed to RMW processing, an error was recorded.

另一方面,在本实施方式中,如图40A所示,在应记录数据“A0”的ECC簇#i+2 6003的物理扇区中,记录伪数据,并作为标记值,设定为Flag-B=1。在其它物理扇区中,记录从作为之前的交替位置的ECC簇#i+1 6002再现的正确的数据。通过这种记录步骤,可继续向ECC簇#i+2记录。On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40A , dummy data is recorded in the physical sector of the ECC cluster #i+2 6003 where the data "A0" should be recorded, and is set to Flag as a flag value. -B=1. In other physical sectors, correct data reproduced from ECC cluster #i+1 6002 which is the previous alternate position is recorded. Through this recording procedure, recording to the ECC cluster #i+2 can be continued.

此时也同样,生成图39B所示的交替管理信息6200。Also at this time, the replacement management information 6200 shown in FIG. 39B is generated.

或者也可以如图39A所示,察看ECC簇#i+1 6001内记录了数据“A0”的物理扇区的Flag-C的值,若是无更新(=1),则从记录ECC簇#i+1 6001之前状态的数据的ECC簇#i 6000读出数据“A0”,并记录到ECC簇#i+2 6002。Or as shown in Figure 39A, check the value of Flag-C of the physical sector that has recorded data "A0" in ECC cluster #i+1 6001, if there is no update (=1), then record ECC cluster #i The ECC cluster #i 6000 of the data in the state before +1 6001 reads the data "A0", and records it in the ECC cluster #i+2 6002.

由于读出这种之前状态的数据,所以本实施方式的各ECC簇具有交替前位置信息,作为其属性信息之一。Since data in such a previous state is read, each ECC cluster in this embodiment has pre-alternation position information as one of its attribute information.

参照图38A、图39A、图40A来说明交替前位置信息。例如,若是ECC簇#i+1 6001,则具有ECC簇#i 6000的开头物理扇区的地址信息,即PSN=a0的值,并作为交替前位置信息6101(参照图38A)。同样,若是ECC簇#i+2,则具有ECC簇#i+1的开头物理扇区的地址信息,即PSN=a2的值,并作为交替前位置信息6102(参照图39A、图40A)。The pre-alternation position information will be described with reference to FIGS. 38A , 39A, and 40A. For example, in the case of ECC cluster #i+1 6001, the address information of the first physical sector of ECC cluster #i 6000, that is, the value of PSN=a0, is provided as position information before replacement 6101 (refer to FIG. 38A ). Similarly, in the case of ECC cluster #i+2, address information of the head physical sector of ECC cluster #i+1, that is, a value of PSN=a2, is provided as pre-alternation position information 6102 (see FIGS. 39A and 40A ).

即,参照图38A说明的向ECC簇#i+1 6001记录数据“B0”是第1次交替记录,由于不存在之前的交替位置,所以对交替前位置信息6101设定交替源的ECC簇#i 6000的开头物理扇区的地址信息、即PSN=a0的值。That is, the recording of data "B0" in the ECC cluster #i+1 6001 described with reference to FIG. 38A is the first alternate recording, and since there is no previous alternate position, the ECC cluster # of the alternate source is set in the pre-alternate position information 6101. The address information of the first physical sector of i 6000, that is, the value of PSN=a0.

另外,参照图39A说明的向ECC簇#i+2 6002记录数据“C2”是第2次之后的交替记录,所以对交替前位置信息6100设定作为之前交替目的地的ECC簇#i+1 6001的开头物理扇区的地址信息、即PSN=a2的值。In addition, the recording of data "C2" in the ECC cluster #i+2 6002 described with reference to FIG. 39A is alternate recording after the second time, so the ECC cluster #i+1 which is the previous alternate destination is set in the pre-alternation position information 6100. The address information of the first physical sector in 6001, that is, the value of PSN=a2.

另外,参照图34A说明的向ECC簇#i 6000记录数据“A0”的情况不是交替记录,故作为表示该内容的信息,对交替前位置信息6100例如设定“0”。Note that the recording of data "A0" in the ECC cluster #i 6000 described with reference to FIG. 34A is not alternate recording, so "0" is set, for example, in the pre-alternation position information 6100 as information indicating this content.

在使用ECC簇的一次写型媒体中,具有如下特性,即,数据的更新变为模拟重写记录,之前的状态数据仍然残留,而记录新的数据。In write-once media using ECC clusters, there is a characteristic that updating of data becomes pseudo-overwrite recording, and new data is recorded while the previous state data remains.

在本实施方式中,通过利用该特征,进一步在ECC簇内新设置表示在RMW处理中是否更新了数据的识别信息、或交替前位置信息,从而能够提高模拟重写记录的可靠性。In the present embodiment, by utilizing this feature, identification information indicating whether data has been updated during RMW processing or position information before replacement is newly provided in the ECC cluster, thereby improving the reliability of pseudo-overwrite recording.

即,设置了表示驱动装置310记录在各物理扇区中的数据是从主机装置305提供的有效数据还是无效数据的属性信息。That is, attribute information indicating whether the data recorded by the drive device 310 in each physical sector is valid data or invalid data supplied from the host device 305 is set.

当是无效数据时,驱动装置310可区别如下内容,即:是由于从主机装置305记录指示的数据容量比ECC簇的容量小、故为了埋入至ECC簇边界而记录的填充数据(Flag-A=1),还是RMW处理中、为了填埋再现失败的物理扇区而记录的无效数据(Flag-B=1)。In the case of invalid data, the drive device 310 can distinguish that it is stuffing data recorded to be embedded in an ECC cluster boundary because the data capacity indicated by the recording from the host device 305 is smaller than the capacity of the ECC cluster (Flag- A=1), and invalid data (Flag-B=1).

在RMW处理中,即便产生再现错误的情况下,也可以通过记录作为无效数据的伪数据,设定表示该状态的属性信息(Flag-B=1),由此完成记录处理。并且,当再现时,可判断在由交替前位置信息所示的位置上是否存在之前的有效数据,通过再现之前的数据,执行从再现错误的恢复。In the RMW process, even if a playback error occurs, the recording process can be completed by recording dummy data as invalid data and setting attribute information (Flag-B=1) indicating this state. Also, when reproducing, it is possible to judge whether there is previous valid data at the position indicated by the pre-alternation position information, and to perform recovery from a reproduction error by reproducing the previous data.

通过以物理扇区为单位来区别由于从主机装置305记录指示的数据容量少而插入的无效数据(填充数据)与伪数据,从而能够判断:在从再现错误的恢复中、来自哪个物理扇区的数据有效。By distinguishing invalid data (fill data) and dummy data inserted due to the small data capacity of the recording instruction from the host device 305 in units of physical sectors, it is possible to determine from which physical sector to recover from a reproduction error. data is valid.

若判断为存在之前的有效数据,则从交替前位置信息所示位置的ECC簇再现数据,得到有效数据。由此,可提高模拟重写记录中的可靠性。If it is determined that previous valid data exists, the data is reproduced from the ECC cluster at the position indicated by the pre-alternation position information to obtain valid data. Accordingly, reliability in pseudo-overwrite recording can be improved.

另外,通过设置交替前位置信息,可以在从交替记录的ECC簇的再现时再现之前的数据,执行从再现错误的恢复。In addition, by setting the pre-alternation position information, it is possible to reproduce previous data at the time of reproduction from an alternately recorded ECC cluster, and perform recovery from a reproduction error.

另外,通过设置该Flag4,可以在如下情况下取得效果。In addition, by setting this Flag4, effects can be obtained in the following cases.

即,当要再现某个代替簇时,有时因某种理由而不能再现该代替簇。例如用户的指纹等污渍附着在代替簇上的情况。That is, when a certain replacement cluster is to be played back, the replacement cluster may not be played back for some reason. For example, when stains such as user's fingerprints adhere to the substitute cluster.

此时,驱动装置310参照交替管理信息的Flag4,在Flag4=00或Flag4=01的情况下,尝试交替源信息1012所示的ECC簇的再现。At this time, the drive device 310 refers to Flag4 of the replacement management information, and attempts playback of the ECC cluster indicated by the replacement source information 1012 when Flag4=00 or Flag4=01.

在Flag4=00的情况下,交替源是缺陷簇,其记录时的检验处理失败。When Flag4=00, the replacement source is a defective cluster, and the verification process at the time of recording has failed.

但是,这次,在执行了再现的情况下有可能再现成功。例如,当检验时和信息记录媒体100的状态变化时(除去污渍、环境温度不同等)或执行再现的驱动装置不同时,有时再现成功。However, this time, if the reproduction is performed, there is a possibility that the reproduction will succeed. For example, when the state of the information recording medium 100 is changed (stain removal, ambient temperature is different, etc.) at the time of inspection, or the drive device for performing reproduction is different, the reproduction may be successful.

若再现成功,则其与应从交替目的地再现的数据相同。由此,即便对代替簇的再现失败,也可以从交替源簇执行必要数据的再现,作为主机装置305,可接收正确的数据。If the reproduction is successful, it is the same as the data to be reproduced from the alternate destination. As a result, even if playback of the replacement cluster fails, necessary data can be played back from the replacement source cluster, and correct data can be received as the host device 305 .

另外,在Flag4=01的情况下,交替源是更新前的簇,通常执行其再现。其中,ECC簇内的部分或全部数据通过更新记录时的RMW处理进行改写。Also, when Flag4=01, the replacement source is the cluster before the update, and its playback is usually performed. Among them, part or all of the data in the ECC cluster is rewritten by the RMW process when updating the record.

相反,由于部分数据在更新前未变更地残留于变更前的簇中,所以该未变更的数据对主机装置305而言是有效数据。Conversely, since some data remains unchanged in the cluster before the update, the unaltered data is valid data for the host device 305 .

并且,由于仅这种未变更的数据从驱动装置310可靠地返回到主机装置305,所以也可以将可识别RMW时更新过的物理扇区与未更新的物理扇区的信息记录在各物理扇区内。例如,作为ECC簇的属性信息的Flag-B或Flag-C相当于此。And, since only such unaltered data is reliably returned from the drive device 310 to the host device 305, it is also possible to record information that can identify the updated physical sector and the non-updated physical sector at the time of RMW in each physical sector. area. For example, Flag-B or Flag-C, which is the attribute information of the ECC cluster, corresponds to this.

由此,可仅向主机装置305返回未更新的物理扇区上的数据。Thus, only the data on the unupdated physical sectors can be returned to the host device 305 .

另外,在Flag4=10的情况下,交替源是与更新后无关系的数据,所以不执行再现,作为再现错误进行处理。Also, when Flag4=10, since the replacement source is data that has nothing to do with the update, playback is not performed, and it is handled as a playback error.

通过执行上述处理,可对信息记录媒体100执行可靠性高的数据的记录和再现。By executing the above processing, it is possible to perform recording and reproduction of highly reliable data on the information recording medium 100 .

作为Flag4=01的一例,如上述交替管理信息514A或交替管理信息6200所示,在执行多次交替记录的情况下,该交替管理信息的交替源信息1012不构成之前的交替目的地簇。As an example of Flag4=01, as shown in the above-mentioned replacement management information 514A or replacement management information 6200, when multiple times of replacement recording is performed, the replacement source information 1012 of the replacement management information does not constitute the previous replacement destination cluster.

例如,由交替管理信息514A的交替源信息1012所示的交替源簇是PSN=1228的ECC簇,但之前的交替目的地簇是PSN=1292的ECC簇。For example, the replacement source cluster indicated by the replacement source information 1012 of the replacement management information 514A is the ECC cluster with PSN=1228, but the previous replacement destination cluster is the ECC cluster with PSN=1292.

由此,在执行了多次交替记录的情况下,通过参照上述交替前位置信息,可知道之前的更新前簇。Thus, when alternate recording has been performed a plurality of times, the previous pre-update cluster can be known by referring to the above-mentioned pre-alternate position information.

例如,在图39B所示的交替管理信息6200的情况下,为状态22001B=“1000”,是指作为交替源簇的PSN=a0的ECC簇#i 6000。For example, in the case of the replacement management information 6200 shown in FIG. 39B, the state 22001B="1000" refers to the ECC cluster #i 6000 with PSN=a0 as the replacement source cluster.

但是,如图39A所示,对于ECC簇#i+2 6002而言,之前的更新前簇是ECC簇#i+1 6001。However, as shown in FIG. 39A, for the ECC cluster #i+2 6002, the previous pre-update cluster is the ECC cluster #i+1 6001.

另外,由于ECC簇#i+2 6002的开头物理扇区在RMW处理中不能再现,所以记录了伪数据(Flag-B=1)。Also, since the head physical sector of ECC cluster #i+2 6002 cannot be reproduced in the RMW process, dummy data (Flag-B=1) is recorded.

此时,驱动装置310在再现ECC簇#i+2 6002时,从作为更新前簇的ECC簇#i+1 6001开始再现数据,代替ECC簇#i+2 6002的开头扇区,将ECC簇#i+1 6001的开头扇区上的数据返回到主机装置305。At this time, when the drive device 310 reproduces the ECC cluster #i+2 6002, it starts to reproduce data from the ECC cluster #i+1 6001 which is the cluster before updating, replaces the head sector of the ECC cluster #i+2 6002, and replaces the ECC cluster #i+2 6002 with The data on the head sector of #i+1 6001 is returned to the host device 305.

(实施方式7)(Embodiment 7)

在由于信息记录媒体上的伤痕或污渍等不能再现最新的交替管理信息列表的情况下,不能特定是否将由再现指示所指定的ECC簇代替其它ECC簇。此时,不能正确再现被再现指示的数据。When the latest replacement management information list cannot be reproduced due to scratches or stains on the information recording medium, it cannot be specified whether to replace the ECC cluster designated by the reproduction instruction with another ECC cluster. In this case, the data instructed to be reproduced cannot be reproduced correctly.

因此,为了正确再现数据,必需调查是否将由再现指示所指定的ECC簇代替了其它ECC簇,并修复最新的交替管理信息列表。Therefore, in order to reproduce data correctly, it is necessary to check whether the ECC cluster designated by the reproduction instruction has replaced another ECC cluster, and to restore the latest replacement management information list.

参照图41来说明:在本实施方式中,因某种理由而不能再现交替管理信息列表1000的一部分或全部时的数据的再现步骤。Referring to FIG. 41 , the procedure for reproducing data when part or all of the replacement management information list 1000 cannot be reproduced for some reason in this embodiment will be described.

图41是表示执行了多次数据记录的信息记录媒体100的一例数据构造的图。FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the information recording medium 100 on which data recording has been performed multiple times.

图41中,将ECC簇#j 7000作为交替源,并执行了多次交替记录,该交替目的地按交替的顺序,设为ECC簇#j+1 7001、#j+2 7002、#j-1 7003。In Figure 41, the ECC cluster #j 7000 is used as the source of the alternation, and multiple alternate recordings are performed. The alternate destinations are set as ECC clusters #j+1 7001, #j+2 7002, #j- 17003.

该记录顺序例如上述实施方式所述的那样,由如下检索步骤来确定,即当检索交替目的地时,按PSN变大的方向检索未记录区域,若到达用户数据区域的终端,则返回开头。The recording order is determined by the search procedure, for example, as described in the above-mentioned embodiment, that is, when searching for an alternate destination, search the unrecorded area in the direction of increasing PSN, and return to the beginning when the end of the user data area is reached.

在本实施方式中,各ECC簇包含图41所示的交替前位置信息。In this embodiment, each ECC cluster includes the pre-alternation position information shown in FIG. 41 .

在该状态下,当由于某种理由而不能再现交替管理信息列表1000的一部分或全部的情况下,若在以前,由于交替记录的对应关系不清楚,所以不能正确再现数据。In this state, if part or all of the alternate management information list 1000 cannot be reproduced for some reason, the data cannot be reproduced correctly because the correspondence relationship of the alternate records is not known in the past.

在本实施方式中,说明通过调查各ECC簇具有的交替前位置信息,修复最新的交替管理信息列表1000,并执行正确的数据再现的方法。In this embodiment, a method of restoring the latest replacement management information list 1000 by checking the pre-replacement position information of each ECC cluster and performing correct data reproduction will be described.

当执行本实施方式的修复处理时,信息记录再现装置300B或驱动装置310再现信息记录媒体100的各ECC簇,并调查各ECC簇具有的交替前位置信息。When performing the restoration process of this embodiment, the information recording and reproducing apparatus 300B or the drive apparatus 310 reproduces each ECC cluster of the information recording medium 100, and checks the pre-replacement position information of each ECC cluster.

即,调查信息记录媒体100的各ECC簇具有的交替前位置信息,对交替前位置信息设定了表示不是交替记录的信息(例如值为“0”)的ECC簇是交替源ECC簇或未完全执行交替的ECC簇。That is, the pre-alternation position information of each ECC cluster of the information recording medium 100 is investigated, and the ECC cluster in which information indicating that it is not alternate recording (for example, a value of "0") is set in the pre-alternation position information is the source ECC cluster or not. Alternating ECC clusters are fully implemented.

其次,交替前位置信息的值不是表示非交替记录的信息的ECC簇,是交替目的地的ECC簇。Next, the value of the pre-alternation position information is not the ECC cluster indicating the non-interleaved recording information, but the ECC cluster of the replacement destination.

图41中,ECC簇#j 7000的交替前位置信息设定了表示非交替记录的信息(例如“0”)。In FIG. 41 , the pre-alternation position information of the ECC cluster #j 7000 is set with information indicating non-alternate recording (for example, "0").

ECC簇#j+1 7001、#j+2 7002、#j-1 7003的交替前位置信息7700、7701、7702分别设定了表示PSN=b1、PSN=b2、PSN=b3的信息。The pre-alternation position information 7700, 7701, 7702 of the ECC clusters #j+1 7001, #j+2 7002, and #j-1 7003 set information indicating PSN=b1, PSN=b2, and PSN=b3, respectively.

在该状态下,必需检测ECC簇#j 7000的最终交替目的地。In this state, it is necessary to detect the final alternate destination of the ECC cluster #j 7000.

使用交替前位置信息来判断ECC簇#j 7000的最新交替目的地。即,可通过搜索交替前位置信息来判断。Use the pre-alternation position information to determine the latest replacement destination of ECC cluster #j 7000. That is, it can be determined by searching the pre-alternation position information.

图41中,可知将ECC簇#j 7000交替为ECC簇#j-1 7003。In FIG. 41, it can be seen that the ECC cluster #j 7000 is replaced with the ECC cluster #j-1 7003.

由此,可再现将ECC簇#j 7000设为交替源、将ECC簇#j-1 7003设为交替目的地的交替管理信息,并可执行交替管理信息列表1000的修复。As a result, replacement management information with ECC cluster #j 7000 as the replacement source and ECC cluster #j-1 7003 as the replacement destination can be reproduced, and the replacement management information list 1000 can be restored.

如上所述,即便在因某种理由而不能再现交替管理信息列表1000的部分或全部时,也可以通过对信息记录媒体100的全部已记录ECC簇调查交替前位置信息的值,从而修复最新的交替管理信息列表1000。As described above, even when part or all of the replacement management information list 1000 cannot be reproduced for some reason, the latest ECC clusters can be restored by checking the value of the position information before replacement for all ECC clusters recorded on the information recording medium 100. Alternate management information list 1000.

即,由于可知交替源与交替目的地的对应关系,所以可再生成交替管理信息列表1000。通过将再生成的交替管理信息列表1000记录在信息记录媒体100中,从而可从下次开始执行通常的再现。That is, since the correspondence relationship between the replacement source and the replacement destination is known, the replacement management information list 1000 can be regenerated. By recording the regenerated replacement management information list 1000 on the information recording medium 100, normal reproduction can be performed from the next time.

另外,作为确定最新交替目的地的其它方法,还有设置更新计数器来作为各ECC簇的属性信息的方法。In addition, as another method of specifying the latest replacement destination, there is a method of setting an update counter as attribute information of each ECC cluster.

更新计数器对新记录的ECC簇设定0。对交替记录目的地的ECC簇,每当执行更新时,都加1后再记录。The update counter is set to 0 for a newly recorded ECC cluster. For the ECC cluster of the alternate recording destination, 1 is added and recorded every time an update is performed.

图41中,ECC簇#j 7000设定“0”,ECC簇#j+1 7001、#j+2 7002、#j-1 7003分别设定“1”、“2”、“3”。In FIG. 41, the ECC cluster #j 7000 is set to "0", and the ECC clusters #j+1 7001, #j+2 7002, and #j-1 7003 are set to "1", "2", and "3", respectively.

该更新计数器中具有最大值的ECC簇为最新的数据。The ECC cluster with the maximum value among the update counters is the latest data.

另外,也可以设置表示记录种类的标记(Flag-D),作为各ECC簇的属性信息。In addition, a flag (Flag-D) indicating a recording type may be provided as attribute information of each ECC cluster.

该标记是表示交替目的地的ECC簇是缺陷簇的交替记录(Flag-D=0)还是模拟重写记录的交替记录(Flag-D=1)的信息。This flag is information indicating whether the ECC cluster of the replacement destination is a defective cluster alternate recording (Flag-D=0) or a pseudo-overwrite recording alternate recording (Flag-D=1).

当述ECC簇#j 7000为缺陷簇的情况下,也不能再现包含于ECC簇#j 7000中的交替前位置信息等属性信息。Even when the ECC cluster #j 7000 is a defective cluster, attribute information such as position information before replacement included in the ECC cluster #j 7000 cannot be reproduced.

此时,若交替目的地的ECC簇中有表示记录种类的标记(Flag-D),则可知道交替源是缺陷簇还是模拟重写记录的更新前的簇。At this time, if there is a flag (Flag-D) indicating the recording type in the ECC cluster of the replacement destination, it can be known whether the replacement source is a defective cluster or a pre-update cluster of pseudo-overwrite recording.

这种信息有利于再生成交替管理信息列表1000。Such information is useful for regenerating the alternate management information list 1000 .

在模拟重写记录中,通过对交替前位置信息设定并记录表示未执行交替记录的信息、交替源簇的地址值、之前的交替目的地的地址值,再现该ECC簇,从而在由于某种理由而破坏了交替管理信息列表的情况下,可执行该修复处理。通过调查全部已记录完成ECC簇的交替前位置信息,可知道是交替源ECC簇还是交替目的地的ECC簇。另外,可判定对交替源ECC簇的最新的交替目的地ECC簇。In the pseudo-overwrite recording, the ECC cluster is reproduced by setting and recording information indicating that alternate recording has not been performed, the address value of the alternate source cluster, and the address value of the previous alternate destination in the pre-alternate position information, thereby reproducing the ECC cluster due to a certain This restoration process can be executed when the alternation management information list is destroyed for any of these reasons. By checking the pre-alternation position information of all recorded ECC clusters, it is possible to know whether the ECC cluster is the source ECC cluster or the ECC cluster of the exchange destination. In addition, it is possible to determine the latest replacement destination ECC cluster for the replacement source ECC cluster.

(实施方式8)(Embodiment 8)

在本实施方式中,说明使用交替前位置信息等各ECC簇的属性信息,执行交替管理信息列表1000的修复的步骤。In this embodiment, a procedure for restoring the replacement management information list 1000 using the attribute information of each ECC cluster such as the position information before replacement will be described.

参照图42来说明本实施方式的数据再现步骤。这里,设使用图36所示的信息记录再现装置300,从信息记录媒体100再现数据。The data reproduction procedure in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42 . Here, it is assumed that data is reproduced from the information recording medium 100 using the information recording and reproducing apparatus 300 shown in FIG. 36 .

图42所示的各步骤由驱动装置310的驱动控制部311来执行。Each step shown in FIG. 42 is executed by the drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 .

(步骤S661)驱动装置310的驱动控制部311从主机装置305接收再现指示。(Step S661 ) The drive control unit 311 of the drive device 310 receives a playback instruction from the host device 305 .

(步骤S662)驱动控制部311根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射,将表示包含于再现指示中的再现位置的逻辑地址变换为物理地址。(Step S662) The drive control unit 311 converts the logical address indicating the playback position included in the playback instruction into a physical address based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

(步骤S663)驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,再现交替管理信息列表1000。另外,通过错误检测修正功能,确定最新的交替管理信息列表1000的再现是否失败。(Step S663 ) The drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproduction unit 314 to reproduce the replacement management information list 1000 . In addition, by the error detection and correction function, it is determined whether or not the reproduction of the latest replacement management information list 1000 has failed.

在确定为最新的交替管理信息列表1000的再现失败的情况下,处理前进到步骤S664。成功的情况下,处理前进到步骤S667。In a case where it is determined that the reproduction of the latest replacement management information list 1000 has failed, the process proceeds to step S664. In case of success, the process proceeds to step S667.

(步骤S664)该步骤在实施减少后述的修复处理步骤的处理量的方法时执行。(Step S664) This step is executed when a method for reducing the processing amount of the restoration processing step described later is implemented.

(步骤S665)驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以再现记录在内周交替区域107与外周交替区域108的交替区域和用户数据区域108中的交替前位置信息。(Step S665 ) The drive control unit 311 controls the recording/reproducing unit 314 to reproduce the pre-alternation position information recorded in the alternate area between the inner alternate area 107 and the outer alternate area 108 and the user data area 108 .

(步骤S666)通过使用再现的交替前位置信息,得到交替源簇的地址信息与交替目的地簇的地址信息。(Step S666) By using the reproduced position information before replacement, the address information of the replacement source cluster and the address information of the replacement destination cluster are obtained.

驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以根据这些信息,生成最新的交替管理信息列表1000,并补写到盘管理信息区域104中的空区域中。The drive control unit 311 controls the recording/reproducing unit 314 so as to generate the latest replacement management information list 1000 based on these information, and overwrite it in an empty area in the disc management information area 104 .

(步骤S667)驱动控制部311从最新的交替管理信息列表中,检索交替管理信息,该交替管理信息包含含有步骤S662中得到的物理地址的ECC簇的开头PSN,作为交替源。(Step S667) The drive control unit 311 searches the latest replacement management information list for replacement management information including the head PSN of the ECC cluster including the physical address obtained in step S662 as the replacement source.

若发现了该交替管理信息,则处理前进到S668。若未发现该交替管理信息,则处理前进到S669。If the replacement management information is found, the process proceeds to S668. If the replacement management information is not found, the process proceeds to S669.

(步骤S668)驱动控制部311设定步骤S667中发现的交替管理信息表示为交替目的地的物理地址,作为再现位置。(Step S668) The drive control section 311 sets the physical address indicated as the replacement destination by the replacement management information found in step S667 as the reproduction position.

(步骤S669)驱动控制部311设定作为再现位置的物理地址,该物理地址是这样得到的,即:根据初始逻辑地址-物理地址映射对再现指示所指定的逻辑地址进行变换而得到。(Step S669) The drive control unit 311 sets the physical address as the playback position obtained by converting the logical address specified by the playback instruction based on the initial logical address-physical address mapping.

(步骤S670)驱动控制部311控制记录再现部314,以从此前步骤中设定的再现位置再现数据。(Step S670) The drive control unit 311 controls the recording and reproduction unit 314 to reproduce data from the reproduction position set in the previous step.

如上所述,在不能再现最新的缺陷管理信息列表的情况下,可利用步骤S664-S666实施的交替管理信息列表的修复处理,正确读取数据。As described above, when the latest defect management information list cannot be reproduced, the data can be correctly read by the restoration process of the alternate management information list performed in steps S664-S666.

但是,根据上述方法,由于在模拟重写记录中,将ECC簇交替为用户数据区域,所以必需读出用户数据区域内所记录区域的全部ECC簇,取得交替前位置信息。因此,调查全部各ECC簇的交替前位置信息需要非常大的处理时间。However, according to the method described above, since the ECC clusters are replaced with the user data area in the pseudo-overwrite recording, it is necessary to read all the ECC clusters in the recorded area in the user data area to obtain position information before replacement. Therefore, it takes a very long processing time to search the pre-alternation position information of all the ECC clusters.

下面说明减少包含该修复处理的再现处理步骤的处理量的方法。Next, a method for reducing the processing amount of the playback processing steps including this restoration processing will be described.

在本实施方式中,若更新交替管理信息列表1000的内容,则补写到盘管理信息区域104中的空区域中。In this embodiment, when the content of the replacement management information list 1000 is updated, it is overwritten in an empty area in the disc management information area 104 .

由于该记录是补写,所以之前的交替管理信息列表1000仍原样残留在信息记录媒体100中,结果,在信息记录媒体100上残留全部交替管理信息列表1000的更新履历。Since this recording is post-writing, the previous replacement management information list 1000 remains on the information recording medium 100 as it is, and as a result, all update histories of the replacement management information list 1000 remain on the information recording medium 100 .

并且,即便不能再现最新的交替管理信息列表1000,或由于记录时的突然断电等而不能记录,之前的交替管理信息列表1000仍被记录在信息记录媒体100中。Furthermore, even if the latest replacement management information list 1000 cannot be reproduced, or cannot be recorded due to sudden power failure during recording, etc., the previous replacement management information list 1000 is still recorded on the information recording medium 100 .

因此,当开始交替管理信息列表1000的修复处理时,选择并利用之前的交替管理信息列表1000、即再现成功的交替管理信息列表1000中最近的交替管理信息列表。Therefore, when the restoration process of the replacement management information list 1000 is started, the previous replacement management information list 1000 , that is, the latest replacement management information list among the replacement management information lists 1000 successfully reproduced is selected and used.

下面,说明减少处理量的修复处理步骤。Next, repair processing procedures for reducing the amount of processing will be described.

(步骤S664)选择再现成功的交替管理信息列表1000中最近的交替管理信息列表。(Step S664) Select the most recent replacement management information list among the replacement management information lists 1000 that have been reproduced successfully.

(步骤S665)在交替区域和用户数据区域中,从包含如下数据的区域再现交替前位置信息,该数据为:在最近的交替管理信息列表中登录的交替管理信息所示的ECC块中记录的数据之后记录的数据。(Step S665) In the replacement area and the user data area, the pre-allocation position information is reproduced from the area containing the data recorded in the ECC block indicated by the replacement management information registered in the latest replacement management information list The data recorded after the data.

(步骤S666)根据再现的交替前位置信息和最近的交替管理信息列表,生成最新的交替管理信息列表。(Step S666) The latest replacement management information list is generated based on the reproduced pre-alternation position information and the latest replacement management information list.

图43A是用于说明利用图43B所示的之前的交替管理信息列表1000来修复处理最新的交替管理信息列表时的步骤图。FIG. 43A is a diagram illustrating a procedure for restoring the latest replacement management information list using the previous replacement management information list 1000 shown in FIG. 43B .

图43A示出某个时刻的信息记录媒体100上的数据构造。FIG. 43A shows the data structure on the information recording medium 100 at a certain point in time.

分配轨道#N 8000、轨道#N+1 8001,并且数据已分别记录在LRA8101、LRA8102。Assign track #N 8000, track #N+1 8001, and the data has been recorded in LRA8101, LRA8102 respectively.

图43B示出对该状态的之前的交替管理信息列表1000。FIG. 43B shows the previous alternation management information list 1000 for this state.

当修复处理交替管理信息列表1000时,调查图42B所示的之前的交替管理信息列表1000的交替目的地位置信息1013所示的PSN。When the replacement management information list 1000 is repaired, the PSN indicated by the replacement destination location information 1013 of the previous replacement management information list 1000 shown in FIG. 42B is checked.

对于该PSN的值,信息记录媒体100上的各轨道内具有最大值的PSN是图43B所示的之前的交替管理信息列表1000中登录的信息内最新的交替目的地。Regarding the PSN value, the PSN having the maximum value in each track on the information recording medium 100 is the latest replacement destination among the information registered in the previous replacement management information list 1000 shown in FIG. 43B .

这是因为在信息记录媒体100的各轨道内,执行按序记录。This is because sequential recording is performed within each track of the information recording medium 100 .

若是图43A的轨道#N 8000,则PSN=a0的ECC簇是图43B所示的之前的交替管理信息列表1000中登录的信息内最新的交替目的地。In the case of track #N 8000 in FIG. 43A, the ECC cluster with PSN=a0 is the latest replacement destination among the information registered in the previous replacement management information list 1000 shown in FIG. 43B.

同样,若是轨道#N+18001,则PSN=b2的ECC簇是图43B所示的之前的交替管理信息列表1000中登录的信息内最新的交替目的地。Similarly, for track #N+18001, the ECC cluster with PSN=b2 is the latest replacement destination among the information registered in the previous replacement management information list 1000 shown in FIG. 43B .

在上述再现或记录失败的最新交替管理信息列表中,交替管理信息列表1000中登录的信息内、最新的交替目的地位置之后的ECC簇之一构成为交替目的地。In the latest replacement management information list for which reproduction or recording has failed, one of the ECC clusters following the latest replacement destination position among the information registered in the replacement management information list 1000 is configured as the replacement destination.

具体而言,若是轨道#N 8000,则PSN=a0之后的ECC簇之一构成为交替目的地。Specifically, in the case of track #N 8000, one of the ECC clusters after PSN=a0 is configured as an alternate destination.

同样,若是轨道#N+18001,则PSN=b2之后的ECC簇之一构成为交替目的地。Similarly, in the case of track #N+18001, one of the ECC clusters after PSN=b2 is configured as an alternate destination.

并且,可知未记录区域中不存在交替目的地。Also, it can be seen that there is no replacement destination in the unrecorded area.

未记录区域的判定可察看最新的轨道管理信息210中的LRA213的值、或使用实际上从检索范围的开头依次再现、并读取再现信号的变化等物理状态的变化进行判定。The unrecorded area can be determined by looking at the value of LRA 213 in the latest track management information 210, or by actually reproducing sequentially from the beginning of the search range and reading changes in physical conditions such as changes in the reproduced signal.

或者,也可以设置如下规定,即在未记录区域的开始位置记录全部由填充数据埋入的ECC簇。Alternatively, a provision may be made to record an ECC cluster in which all padding data is embedded at the start position of the unrecorded area.

由此,当考虑了上述修复处理时,对每个轨道调查包含在再现成功的最近交替管理信息列表中登录的记录数据之后记录的数据的区域,将这些区域作为检索范围,调查交替前位置信息即可。Thus, when the restoration process described above is taken into consideration, areas including data recorded after the recorded data registered in the most recent replacement management information list that has been successfully reproduced are searched for each track, and the pre-change position information is searched for these areas as a search range. That's it.

具体而言,仅再现图43A所示的检索范围8201和检索范围8202的一部分,若调查该范围中包含的ECC簇的交替前位置信息,则可根据图42B所示的之前的交替管理信息列表1000来修复最新的交替管理信息列表。Specifically, only a part of the search range 8201 and the search range 8202 shown in FIG. 43A are reproduced, and if the location information before the replacement of the ECC clusters included in the range is checked, the previous replacement management information list shown in FIG. 42B can be used. 1000 to fix up-to-date alternate management info list.

利用这种方法,可以不需要对信息记录媒体100的整体进行再现,大幅度减少交替管理信息列表的修复处理所需的处理量。即,可以使用从检索范围再现的交替前位置信息,生成交替管理信息,并反映到再现成功的最近交替管理信息列表,由此制作最新的交替管理信息列表。This method eliminates the need to reproduce the entire information recording medium 100, and greatly reduces the amount of processing required for restoration of the alternate management information list. In other words, the latest replacement management information list can be created by generating replacement management information using the position information before replacement reproduced from the search range and reflecting it in the latest replacement management information list that has been successfully reproduced.

另外,在一起记录区段管理信息200与交替管理信息列表1000的情况下,对于区段管理信息200而言,其履历也被记录在信息记录媒体100上。此时,也可以使用区段管理信息200来设定调查交替前位置信息的检索范围。In addition, when the segment management information 200 and the replacement management information list 1000 are recorded together, the history of the segment management information 200 is also recorded on the information recording medium 100 . In this case, the segment management information 200 may be used to set the search range of the pre-alternation location information.

具体而言,可知在如下位置之后记录数据的区域是在记录了再现成功的最近交替管理信息列表之后记录的区域,该位置为:在与再现成功的最近交替管理信息列表1000一起被记录的区段管理信息200中登录的轨道内最终数据记录位置信息(LRA)所示的位置。因此,通过将该区域设为调查交替前位置信息的检索范围,可以进一步减少交替管理信息列表的修复处理所需的处理量。Specifically, it can be seen that the area where data is recorded after the position where the most recent replacement management information list 1000 that has been successfully reproduced is recorded is the area that is recorded after the most recent replacement management information list 1000 that has been successfully reproduced is recorded. The position indicated by the last data recording position information (LRA) in the track registered in the segment management information 200 . Therefore, by setting this area as a search range for investigating the pre-alternation position information, it is possible to further reduce the amount of processing required for restoration processing of the replacement management information list.

说明了利用再现指示来修复交替管理信息列表1000的实例,但也可以利用修复指示来执行。An example of repairing the replacement management information list 1000 using a playback instruction was described, but it can also be performed using a restoration instruction.

在本发明的实施方式中,说明了将交替管理信息列表1000记录在盘管理信息区域104中的实例,但不限于盘管理信息区域104,例如也可以将交替管理信息列表1000记录在交替区域中的未记录区域中。In the embodiment of the present invention, an example in which the replacement management information list 1000 is recorded in the disk management information area 104 is described, but it is not limited to the disk management information area 104. For example, the replacement management information list 1000 may also be recorded in the replacement area. in the unrecorded area of .

本发明用于提供一种在一次写型光盘的模拟重写记录中,可以不浪费地使用用户数据区域的驱动装置等。The present invention is intended to provide a drive device and the like which can use a user data area without waste in pseudo-overwrite recording of a write-once optical disc.

Claims (1)

1.一种对记录在一次写型记录媒体中的数据进行再现的方法,其特征在于:1. A method for reproducing data recorded in a write-once recording medium, characterized in that: 所述一次写型记录媒体包含交替区域和用户数据区域,said write-once recording medium comprises an alternate area and a user data area, 所述交替区域与所述用户数据区域分别包含多个ECC簇,The alternate area and the user data area respectively include a plurality of ECC clusters, 所述多个ECC簇分别包含多个物理扇区,The multiple ECC clusters respectively include multiple physical sectors, 在所述多个ECC簇中分别记录了交替前位置信息,Pre-alternation position information is respectively recorded in the plurality of ECC clusters, 在根据记录指示执行的数据记录是补写的情况下,对所述交替前位置信息设定表示不执行交替记录的信息,When the data recording performed according to the recording instruction is overwriting, information indicating that alternate recording is not performed is set in the pre-alternation position information, 在根据所述记录指示执行的数据记录是第1次模拟重写记录的情况下,对所述交替前位置信息设定表示由所述记录指示所指定的位置的信息,When the data recording performed according to the recording instruction is the first pseudo-overwrite recording, information indicating a position specified by the recording instruction is set in the pre-alternation position information, 在根据所述记录指示执行的数据记录是第2次以后的模拟重写记录的情况下,对所述交替前位置信息设定表示由所述记录指示指定的位置的交替目的地的信息,When the data recording executed according to the recording instruction is the second or later pseudo-overwrite recording, setting information indicating a replacement destination of a position specified by the recording instruction to the pre-alternation position information, 该方法包括具有如下步骤的处理:The method includes processing with the steps of: 接收再现指示;receive reproduction instructions; 响应于所述再现指示,确定最新的交替管理信息列表的再现是否失败;determining whether reproduction of the latest alternate management information list has failed in response to the reproduction instruction; 在确定为所述最新的交替管理信息列表的再现失败的情况下,对记录在所述交替区域和所述用户数据区域中的交替前位置信息进行再现;In a case where it is determined that the reproduction of the latest replacement management information list has failed, reproducing the position information before replacement recorded in the replacement area and the user data area; 根据所述再现的交替前位置信息,生成最新的交替管理信息列表;和generating the latest replacement management information list based on the reproduced pre-alternation position information; and 将所述最新的交替管理信息列表记录在所述规定的位置。Recording the latest replacement management information list in the specified location.
CN2010101261941A 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 drive unit Expired - Fee Related CN101777367B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (16)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2004-177668 2004-06-15
JP2004177666 2004-06-15
JP2004177663 2004-06-15
JP2004-177664 2004-06-15
JP2004-177662 2004-06-15
JP2004177665 2004-06-15
JP2004177662 2004-06-15
JP2004177664 2004-06-15
JP2004177668 2004-06-15
JP2004-177663 2004-06-15
JP2004-177666 2004-06-15
JP2004-177665 2004-06-15
JP2004-189013 2004-06-25
JP2004189013 2004-06-25
JP2004255440 2004-09-02
JP2004-255440 2004-09-02

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN2005800272166A Division CN101015014B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 Drive device

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN101777367A CN101777367A (en) 2010-07-14
CN101777367B true CN101777367B (en) 2012-02-22

Family

ID=35509961

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN2009102040587A Expired - Fee Related CN101877233B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 drive unit
CN2009102040572A Expired - Fee Related CN101882453B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 Drive device
CN2010101261941A Expired - Fee Related CN101777367B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 drive unit
CN2010101345152A Expired - Fee Related CN101807418B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 Drive device

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN2009102040587A Expired - Fee Related CN101877233B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 drive unit
CN2009102040572A Expired - Fee Related CN101882453B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 Drive device

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN2010101345152A Expired - Fee Related CN101807418B (en) 2004-06-15 2005-06-15 Drive device

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (3) US7940613B2 (en)
EP (2) EP1768126A4 (en)
JP (5) JP4495156B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101138641B1 (en)
CN (4) CN101877233B (en)
WO (3) WO2005124772A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (23)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20040028469A (en) 2002-09-30 2004-04-03 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for managing a defect area on optical disc write once
ES2340844T3 (en) 2002-12-11 2010-06-10 Lg Electronics, Inc. METHOD OF OVERWRITING MANAGEMENT AND METHOD OF RECORDING OF MANAGEMENT INFORMATION OF AN OPTICAL DISK OF A SINGLE WRITING.
TWI314315B (en) 2003-01-27 2009-09-01 Lg Electronics Inc Optical disc of write once type, method, and apparatus for managing defect information on the optical disc
CA2525133C (en) 2003-05-09 2013-09-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Write once optical disc, and method and apparatus for recovering disc management information from the write once optical disc
US8223607B2 (en) 2003-07-04 2012-07-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for managing a overwrite recording on optical disc write once
US7313065B2 (en) 2003-08-05 2007-12-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Write-once optical disc, and method and apparatus for recording/reproducing management information on/from optical disc
KR100667758B1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2007-01-11 삼성전자주식회사 Information storage media, recording / reproducing apparatus, and recording / reproducing method
US7500137B2 (en) * 2004-09-14 2009-03-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, and method and apparatus of recording and reproducing data on the same
KR100667784B1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2007-01-11 삼성전자주식회사 Recording / reproducing apparatus for performing ROM by ROM, its recording / reproducing method, and its information storage medium
FI120175B (en) * 2006-10-27 2009-07-15 Tellabs Oy Transfer of digital information in a development-based data transmission network
KR100793232B1 (en) * 2006-11-17 2008-01-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Title Recording and Playback Method in Optical Disc Device
JP4721063B2 (en) * 2006-12-12 2011-07-13 ソニー株式会社 Optical disc apparatus and recording control method
JP4932505B2 (en) * 2007-01-19 2012-05-16 ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 Optical disk controller and optical disk drive system
WO2009025715A1 (en) * 2007-08-22 2009-02-26 Thomson Licensing Hard disk sector/track remapping for transparent wear leveling
KR101453296B1 (en) * 2008-01-10 2014-10-21 삼성전자주식회사 Information recording medium, recording/reproducing apparatus, and recording/reproducing method
JP5000632B2 (en) * 2008-12-26 2012-08-15 シャープ株式会社 Information recording medium, information recording / reproducing apparatus, linkage system, control program for these apparatuses or systems, and computer-readable recording medium
WO2011096201A1 (en) * 2010-02-04 2011-08-11 パナソニック株式会社 Information reproduction device and information reproduction method
US9098428B2 (en) * 2012-12-11 2015-08-04 Sandisk Technologies Inc. Data recovery on cluster failures and ECC enhancements with code word interleaving
JP2016042401A (en) 2014-08-19 2016-03-31 ソニー株式会社 Information processing device and method, recording medium, and program
US10055267B2 (en) 2015-03-04 2018-08-21 Sandisk Technologies Llc Block management scheme to handle cluster failures in non-volatile memory
US10147452B2 (en) * 2015-05-25 2018-12-04 Sony Corporation Recording apparatus, recording method, and recording medium
US10042582B2 (en) 2015-08-28 2018-08-07 Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Ltd. Data erasing method
CN111785306B (en) * 2019-04-03 2021-06-08 光宝电子(广州)有限公司 Control method for failed writing of optical disk in optical disk drive system

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5521900A (en) * 1990-08-24 1996-05-28 Sony Corporation Disk having a lead-in region containing display data and an apparatus for recording and/or reproducing the disc
DE19755371A1 (en) * 1996-12-31 1998-07-02 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Access performance improvement method for hard disk drive
CN1257274A (en) * 1998-11-10 2000-06-21 三星电子株式会社 Method for distributing spare zone and managing defect and recording medium thereof
US6426928B1 (en) * 1999-03-31 2002-07-30 International Business Machines Corporation Ability to distinguish true disk write errors

Family Cites Families (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5877034A (en) * 1981-10-30 1983-05-10 Hitachi Ltd Controlling system for unrewritable storage device
JPS6086622A (en) 1983-10-19 1985-05-16 Nec Corp Input and output controller of disc device
US4953122A (en) * 1986-10-31 1990-08-28 Laserdrive Ltd. Pseudo-erasable and rewritable write-once optical disk memory system
JPH0223417A (en) * 1988-07-13 1990-01-25 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Information recording system and information recording medium
FI85112C (en) * 1989-09-11 1992-03-10 Toolsystem Oy Bending device for thin sheets and method for bending thin sheets takes
US5448728A (en) * 1991-08-08 1995-09-05 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Storage medium control system for controlling a write-once read-many storage medium
JPH0620442A (en) * 1992-07-02 1994-01-28 Toshiba Corp Fault recovery method for magneto-optical disk
JP3370724B2 (en) 1993-03-17 2003-01-27 株式会社リコー Information recording device
EP0879466A1 (en) * 1995-03-03 1998-11-25 Cirrus Logic, Inc. Defect management for automatic track processing without id field
JPH10320924A (en) * 1997-05-21 1998-12-04 Canon Inc Method for recording information
JPH11213626A (en) 1998-01-21 1999-08-06 Toshiba Corp Data recording medium, data recording apparatus and data reproducing apparatus
JPH11339385A (en) 1998-05-22 1999-12-10 Canon Inc Information reproducing method
JP2000040306A (en) * 1998-07-23 2000-02-08 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Draw type optical disk using rewritable recording film, method and device for initializing optical disk, method and device for reproducing optical disk and method and device for writing-once optical disk
US6189118B1 (en) * 1998-10-22 2001-02-13 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Information recording medium, and method and apparatus for managing defect thereof
US6466532B1 (en) * 1998-11-10 2002-10-15 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Recording medium having spare area for defect management and information on defect management, and method and apparatus of allocating spare area and managing defects
US6552982B1 (en) * 1999-03-08 2003-04-22 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Information recording medium, information recording and reproduction method, and information recording and reproduction apparatus
JP4116740B2 (en) * 1999-03-08 2008-07-09 松下電器産業株式会社 Information recording medium, information recording method, information recording apparatus, and information reproducing apparatus
US6160778A (en) * 1999-03-08 2000-12-12 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Information recording medium, information recording method, information recording apparatus and information reproducing apparatus
WO2001034317A1 (en) * 1999-11-05 2001-05-17 Amada Company, Limited Press brake and method of controlling bidirectional fluid pump of hydraulic cylinder of press brake
JP3735498B2 (en) * 1999-11-09 2006-01-18 株式会社東芝 Information recording medium, information recording apparatus, and information recording method
JP3975631B2 (en) * 1999-12-24 2007-09-12 株式会社日立製作所 Optical disc apparatus and data recording method thereof
US6690879B2 (en) * 2000-02-16 2004-02-10 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus of helical scan type
JP4344485B2 (en) * 2000-03-08 2009-10-14 パナソニック株式会社 Information recording medium, information recording method, and information reproducing method
AT411164B (en) * 2000-08-16 2003-10-27 Trumpf Maschinen Austria Gmbh METHOD FOR OPERATING A BENDING PRESSURE AND BENDING PRESSURE, IN PARTICULAR BUTTING PRESSURE
KR20040027259A (en) * 2002-09-26 2004-04-01 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for managing a defect area on optical disc write once
CN1685418A (en) * 2002-09-27 2005-10-19 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Methods and devices for defect and reallocation management on write-once media
JP4606693B2 (en) * 2002-11-22 2011-01-05 ソニー株式会社 Optical disc, recording device, playback device, recording method, playback method
ES2340844T3 (en) * 2002-12-11 2010-06-10 Lg Electronics, Inc. METHOD OF OVERWRITING MANAGEMENT AND METHOD OF RECORDING OF MANAGEMENT INFORMATION OF AN OPTICAL DISK OF A SINGLE WRITING.
CN2602625Y (en) * 2002-12-26 2004-02-11 李建波 Inflating type portable medicinal ankle protector
JP2006521660A (en) * 2003-03-24 2006-09-21 サムスン エレクトロニクス カンパニー リミテッド Method for overwriting data on write-once information recording medium and data recording and / or reproducing apparatus for write-once information recording medium
JP4095977B2 (en) * 2004-03-11 2008-06-04 株式会社リコー Defect management method and information recording apparatus
JP2005322337A (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Pioneer Electronic Corp Information recording medium, device and method for recording for the same, device and method for reproducing for the same, computer program for recording or reproducing control, and data structure including control signal
CA2535735A1 (en) * 2004-06-15 2005-12-29 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Drive device
KR101012378B1 (en) * 2004-08-16 2011-02-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for recording and reproducing optical storage media
CN201030395Y (en) * 2006-12-29 2008-03-05 上海宝冶建设有限公司 Steel plate bending press

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5521900A (en) * 1990-08-24 1996-05-28 Sony Corporation Disk having a lead-in region containing display data and an apparatus for recording and/or reproducing the disc
DE19755371A1 (en) * 1996-12-31 1998-07-02 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Access performance improvement method for hard disk drive
CN1257274A (en) * 1998-11-10 2000-06-21 三星电子株式会社 Method for distributing spare zone and managing defect and recording medium thereof
US6426928B1 (en) * 1999-03-31 2002-07-30 International Business Machines Corporation Ability to distinguish true disk write errors

Non-Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
JP特开2000-195181A 2000.07.14
JP特开2000-322837A 2000.11.24
JP特开平11-213626A 1999.08.06
JP特开平11-339385A 1999.12.10
JP特开平6-275023A 1994.09.30

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101882453B (en) 2012-06-20
US20080304377A1 (en) 2008-12-11
JPWO2005124774A1 (en) 2008-04-17
US20080019247A1 (en) 2008-01-24
CN101807418B (en) 2013-03-13
CN101807418A (en) 2010-08-18
US7924666B2 (en) 2011-04-12
JP2010049793A (en) 2010-03-04
JPWO2005124773A1 (en) 2008-04-17
CN101777367A (en) 2010-07-14
WO2005124773A1 (en) 2005-12-29
CN101877233A (en) 2010-11-03
EP1760716A1 (en) 2007-03-07
KR101138641B1 (en) 2012-04-26
KR20070029747A (en) 2007-03-14
JP2010049795A (en) 2010-03-04
CN101877233B (en) 2013-01-02
EP1760716A4 (en) 2012-02-22
JP4495156B2 (en) 2010-06-30
WO2005124774A1 (en) 2005-12-29
US7990825B2 (en) 2011-08-02
JP4451441B2 (en) 2010-04-14
EP1768126A1 (en) 2007-03-28
JPWO2005124772A1 (en) 2008-04-17
JP5044632B2 (en) 2012-10-10
JP4901943B2 (en) 2012-03-21
EP1768126A4 (en) 2013-03-13
CN101882453A (en) 2010-11-10
US7940613B2 (en) 2011-05-10
US20080198710A1 (en) 2008-08-21
WO2005124772A1 (en) 2005-12-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4901943B2 (en) Drive device
JP4989711B2 (en) Drive device
CN101859579A (en) drive unit
CN101707060B (en) Drive device
CN101015015B (en) drive unit
WO2005124769A1 (en) Drive device
CN101006509B (en) drive unit

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
PB01 Publication
C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
C14 Grant of patent or utility model
GR01 Patent grant
CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee

Granted publication date: 20120222

Termination date: 20200615

CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee